WO2022085491A1 - Electrical stimulation training information transmission device, electrical stimulation training information reception device, electrical stimulation training information communication device, electrical stimulation training information communication method, and electrical stimulation training information communication program - Google Patents
Electrical stimulation training information transmission device, electrical stimulation training information reception device, electrical stimulation training information communication device, electrical stimulation training information communication method, and electrical stimulation training information communication program Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022085491A1 WO2022085491A1 PCT/JP2021/037358 JP2021037358W WO2022085491A1 WO 2022085491 A1 WO2022085491 A1 WO 2022085491A1 JP 2021037358 W JP2021037358 W JP 2021037358W WO 2022085491 A1 WO2022085491 A1 WO 2022085491A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- training
- electrical stimulation
- user
- synchronization signal
- data
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61N—ELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
- A61N1/00—Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
- A61N1/18—Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
- A61N1/32—Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
- A61N1/36—Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B69/00—Training appliances or apparatus for special sports
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
- A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
- G16Y—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE INTERNET OF THINGS [IoT]
- G16Y10/00—Economic sectors
- G16Y10/60—Healthcare; Welfare
Definitions
- the present invention relates to the communication of information regarding training accompanied by the application of electrical stimulation.
- the present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide an electrical stimulation training information transmission device or the like that can effectively train even a remote user.
- the electrical stimulation training information transmission device includes a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training and an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training.
- An electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by the device, a synchronization signal generation unit that generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing video data and instruction data, and a transmission unit that transmits video data and synchronization signals. And prepare.
- the user can effectively perform training with electrical stimulation while watching the received video.
- the video may be arbitrary, but for example, if a video of an instructor demonstrating training is shown, the user can effectively train according to it.
- the combination of the image synchronized with the synchronized signal received together and the electrical stimulus enhances the immersive feeling in the training, and an excellent training effect can be obtained.
- Another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information receiving device.
- This device is a receiver that receives video data viewed by the user during training and a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data of the electrical stimulation given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training.
- a data synchronization unit that synchronizes video data and instruction data based on the synchronization signal.
- Yet another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information communication device.
- This device includes a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data of electrical stimulation given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training.
- a synchronization signal generator that generates a synchronization signal for synchronization of video data and instruction data, a transmission unit that transmits video data and synchronization signal, a reception unit that receives video data and synchronization signal, and a synchronization signal.
- a data synchronization unit for synchronizing video data and instruction data is provided.
- Yet another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information communication method.
- This method includes a video data providing step that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing step that provides instruction data of electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training.
- the sync signal generation step to generate the sync signal for syncing the video data and the instruction data
- the transmit step to transmit the video data and the sync signal
- the receive step to receive the video data and the sync signal
- the sync signal A data synchronization step for synchronizing video data and instruction data is provided.
- FIG. 1 schematically shows the configuration of a motion control system in which the electrical stimulation training information communication device according to the embodiment is realized.
- the motion control system 100 executes a predetermined training program 2 under the supervision of a director who uses the director terminal 12e, and receives demonstration guidance of an instructor who uses the instructor terminal 12d while using the user terminals 12a, 12b, and 12c, respectively.
- the local or remote user who uses it provides training with electrical stimulation to the muscles.
- This figure simply shows two users who train at the fitness gym 80 as a store where the instructor gives demonstration guidance, and one user who trains remotely at a personal space 81 such as a home. A large number of users can train at the same time.
- the number of users can be increased to the maximum number of people who can be trained according to the space, and in the personal space 81, the number of users can be increased within the range not exceeding the processing capacity of the information communication network and the information processing server described later. ..
- hundreds to thousands (and in some cases more) of users can participate in training at the same time.
- a large number of users can simultaneously and simultaneously perform a high-quality training program 2 that combines video, audio, and electrical stimulation to create a sense of unity with the instructor and other users, a sense of exhilaration during training, and a sense of immersion in training. It can be produced and a high training effect can be realized.
- the user terminals 12a, 12b, and 12c (hereinafter, collectively referred to as the user terminal 12; the subscripts of a, b, and c indicating the user's distinction are appropriately omitted for the user terminal 12 and other components). It includes a display screen 13, a speaker 14, and an operation unit 15.
- the display screen 13 displays an image that the user sees during training.
- the details of the video will be described later, but for example, the video prepared in advance during the training program 2, the live video of the fitness gym 80 (video of the instructor demonstrating, the video of the user during training, etc.), and the director as needed.
- the images to be inserted can be combined as appropriate.
- the displayed image may be changed between the local user in the fitness gym 80 and the remote user in the personal space 81. For example, it is necessary to display an image of the instructor (live image 831 of the instructor in FIGS. 17 (A) and 18 (A)) on the display screen 13 of a user who receives demonstration guidance from the instructor in front of the fitness gym 80.
- the display simple it is possible to call attention to the instructor in front of the display screen 13 instead of the display screen 13.
- the live image of the fitness gym 80 is extremely effective for training with a sense of reality as if he / she is in the fitness gym 80.
- a common screen may be provided in the training space.
- the speaker 14 plays a voice by the user during training.
- the details of the voice will be described later, but for example, music such as BGM prepared in advance during the training program 2, live voice from the fitness gym 80 (instructor's instruction voice to demonstrate, voice of the user during training, etc.),
- the audio that the director inserts as needed can be combined as appropriate.
- the sound to be reproduced may be changed between the local user in the fitness gym 80 and the remote user in the personal space 81. For example, a user who can directly hear the live sound of the fitness gym 80 does not need to reproduce the live sound from the speaker 14, so that the speaker 14 may not be provided in the user terminal 12 in some cases.
- the live voice of the fitness gym 80 is extremely effective for training with a sense of reality as if he / she is in the fitness gym 80.
- a common speaker may be provided in the training space.
- the operation unit 15 is a component for the user to perform various operations, and is realized by a GUI on the display screen 13 composed of a touch panel. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the GUI, and may be configured by a physical button or the like provided on the user terminal 12. As will be described later, the operation unit 15 of the present embodiment constitutes an intention display unit that displays an intention to the instructor or the director based on the operation of the user during training.
- the user terminal 12 having the above configuration can be configured by a general-purpose electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone.
- a training-dedicated terminal assigned to each user during training may be installed in advance in the training space, and each function of the user terminal 12 can be realized by the training-dedicated terminal.
- each function of the user terminal 12 may be integrally configured with a training device (for example, a motorcycle 103 described below) used by a local or remote user during training.
- the EMS device 102 and the bike 103 are training devices used by the user during training.
- the EMS device 102 is an electrical stimulator worn by the user during training to tension and relax muscles with a weak current to strengthen muscle strength (EMS is an abbreviation for Electrical Muscle Stimulation, which means muscular electrical stimulation). .. A specific example thereof will be described later, but the EMS device 102 is provided with electrodes that come into contact with body parts (for example, abdominal muscles, flanks, arms, legs, buttocks, palms) for which muscle strength is desired to be strengthened, and a weak electric current is applied from the electrodes. Shed.
- the EMS device 102 may be configured as fitness wear in which a plurality of electrodes are arranged so that electrical stimulation can be applied to a plurality of parts at the same time, or an independent EMS device 102 may be individually worn for each part. May be good.
- the bike 103 is a training device that has a shape and structure that imitates a bicycle and drives a loaded wheel by the leg force applied to the pedal.
- the bike 103 supports voluntary movements in which the user consciously moves the body (in this case, pedals).
- the EMS device 102 supports involuntary movements that forcibly move muscles by a weak electric current.
- voluntary movements are generally suitable for training slow muscles, while fast muscles that are difficult to train with voluntary movements can be effectively trained with involuntary movements by the EMS device 102. Therefore, by the hybrid training as described above, the slow muscle and the fast muscle can be trained in a well-balanced manner, and the training effect can be dramatically enhanced.
- a specific example of the motorcycle 103 will be described later.
- the device information acquisition unit 108 acquires various information from the EMS device 102 and the motorcycle 103.
- information such as a site to which electrical stimulation is applied, the strength of electrical stimulation, the frequency of electrical stimulation, and the like can be acquired.
- information such as rotation speed, speed, mileage, output (also called power and power), calorie consumption, and wheel load can be acquired.
- These device information are shared with the instructor terminal 12d and the director terminal 12e at any time, and are sent to the program control unit 3 described later, and necessary information is transmitted to the video data displayed on the display screen 13 and the speaker 14. It is embedded in the audio data to be played.
- the instructor terminal 12d is a terminal used by an instructor who provides training demonstration guidance to a local or remote user. Basically, it may be configured in the same manner as the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c, but it is preferable to omit or simplify the function corresponding to the operation unit 15 so that the instructor can concentrate on the demonstration instruction. As will be described later, when some operation is required for the user during training, the director mainly performs the operation from the director terminal 12e instead of the instructor.
- the instructor terminal 12d as described above may be configured by a general-purpose electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone, or may be configured by a training-dedicated terminal assigned to an instructor at the fitness gym 80. Further, when the instructor himself / herself uses a training device such as a motorcycle 103 for demonstration guidance, the function of the instructor terminal 12d may be integrally configured with the training device.
- the camera 109 is a shooting means for shooting a live image of the fitness gym 80.
- the uplifting state of the fitness gym 80 is transmitted to the user who watches the live image from the remote personal space 81 with a sense of reality, and the training is conducted by the instructor who is seriously training at the fitness gym 80 and the remote user who is inspired by other users.
- a dynamic image is shot using a plurality of cameras 109 so as to enhance the immersive feeling.
- these images are switched and displayed on the display screen 13 by the processing method defined in the training program 2 or the operation of the director terminal 12e at any time.
- the instructor explains the training content while demonstrating it, it is preferable to show a large amount of the instructor's image so that the user can understand it properly.
- the microphone 110 is a voice acquisition means for acquiring the live voice of the fitness gym 80.
- the most important of the live voices are the instructor's instruction voice and the voice that inspires the user. Therefore, it is preferable to use a pin microphone or the like that the instructor can wear hands-free during training.
- a microphone 110 for acquiring the sound of the entire training space of the fitness gym 80 may be provided, or a microphone 110 for acquiring the sound of the user of the fitness gym 80 may be provided in each user terminal 12a and 12b.
- a microphone may be provided in the user terminal 12c of the remote user to acquire the user voice. In this case, voice communication during training becomes possible between the instructor or user in the fitness gym 80 and the user in the remote personal space 81 via the communication function described later.
- the director terminal 12e is a terminal used by the director who supervises the training from the training space or the back office. Basically, it may be configured in the same manner as the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c, but since the director needs to perform various operations such as start and end of the training program 2, troubleshooting during training, and emergency stop.
- the functions of the operation unit 15 are substantial (details will be described later with reference to the screen example).
- a relatively large electronic device such as a personal computer can be used as the director terminal 12e.
- the training program 2 has EMS instruction data 2A, video data 2B, and voice data 2C as main components, and provides the user during training by combining electrical stimulation (EMS), video, and voice based on the respective data.
- the length of one training program 2 is arbitrary, but can be set to, for example, about 30 to 60 minutes. Further, as will be described later, one training program 2 may be divided into a plurality of sets having a length of, for example, about 10 to 20 minutes. In this case, an interval of, for example, about 5 minutes may be provided between each set to promote refreshment and recovery from fatigue, and to enhance the user's concentration toward the next set.
- the electrical stimulation may be stopped during the interval, it is preferable to continuously play the video and audio suitable for refreshing.
- the EMS instruction data 2A instructs the electrical stimulation given by the user's EMS device 102 during the execution of the training program 2.
- the frequency and intensity (level) of the electrical stimulus at any time during the execution of the training program 2 can be specified.
- various electrical stimulation patterns can be realized by regularly changing such frequencies and intensities (electrical stimulation that causes small numbness, electrical stimulation that slowly pinches, etc.).
- the intensity of the electrical stimulation is adjusted mainly based on the operation of the user or the director, and in the following description, the EMS instruction data 2A mainly indicates the frequency. And.
- any frequency can be specified in the EMS instruction data 2A, it is preferable to use the following frequencies for different purposes or phases during training.
- 4Hz to 8Hz In the warm-up phase such as at the start of the program, in order to smoothly shift to the full-scale training phase, the training is started at 4Hz and increased to 8Hz through the intermediate stage of 6Hz. In the cool-down phase such as at the end of the program, the frequency is lowered in the order of 8 Hz, 6 Hz, and 4 Hz. It is also preferable to use this frequency band in the interval phase between sets.
- 4Hz In the training phase, a simple contraction is promoted to apply a momentary load to the muscle. 20Hz: In the training phase, incomplete tetanus is promoted to apply a continuous load.
- a plurality of types of EMS modes in which the above-mentioned energization frequency, energization time, energization pattern, etc. are preset are stored in the setting unit 56 of the EMS device 102, and the EMS instruction is given.
- the data 2A is composed of data that specifies the EMS mode in each set of the training program 2.
- the video data 2B is the default video data to be displayed on the display screen 13 during training, during the interval between sets, before and after the start of training, and the like.
- the live image of the fitness gym 80 taken by the camera 109 is mainly displayed, so the default image is rarely displayed in full screen, but it depends on the image of the fitness gym 80. It can be used as appropriate for introductions and video explanations of training content. Further, it is also possible to store the backup video to be played when the live video of the fitness gym 80 cannot be displayed due to some trouble in the video data 2B.
- an effect video that can show the direction, size, speed, load, etc.
- a series of figures for example, a pentagon
- Speed up blink the fireworks-like image at the timing when repeating the movement of sticking out the arm like boxing, a wavy figure that slowly changes so that you can put in force when doing heavy strength training Is displayed, etc.
- the instructor is photographed by the camera 109 in the fitness gym 80, if a screen or the like for displaying the above effect image is provided in advance in the background, the live image photographed by the camera 109 is used as it is. do it.
- the voice data 2C is the default voice data to be played back by the speaker 14 during the execution of the training program 2. It is preferable to prepare BGM with an appropriate musical tone as voice data 2C according to various phases from before the start of training to after the end of training. During non-training, for example, before the start of training, during the interval between sets, and after the end of training, it is preferable to adopt a calm tone BGM. Further, during training, it is preferable to employ a BGM that stimulates the sympathetic nerve and induces a mental and physical state suitable for strenuous exercise, for example, a BGM having a fast tempo and abundant rhythm.
- the instructor can effectively arrange the timing of each movement of the voluntary movement during training according to the tempo, rhythm, and volume of the BGM. For example, in the case of training that repeats the movement of sticking out the arm like boxing and training that repeats the movement of pedaling like the bike 103, by synchronizing the timing of each movement with the change of BGM rhythm, beat, and strength. , The user can get the pleasure of training to the music and can forget the feeling of fatigue and concentrate on the training.
- the user's immersive feeling is achieved by synchronizing the electrical stimulation by the EMS instruction data 2A, the image by the video data 2B, the voice by the voice data 2C, and the operation instruction by the instructor with high accuracy. It is extremely important to maximize the training effect.
- the synchronization state of the data is maintained because the transmission delay difference can be ignored, but each of the above data is stored in the remote personal space 81 via the network 19.
- the transmission delay difference cannot be ignored and the data synchronization status may be disrupted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when each of the above data is transmitted to a remote user, a synchronization signal for data synchronization is added.
- the training program 2 as described above is one consisting of EMS instruction data 2A, video data 2B, and audio data 2C, which is an archive of training that was live-streamed in the past or recorded for distribution at a later date. It may be prepared as a package. These recorded training programs 2 may be delivered by designating a start time as in the case of live delivery, or may be in a state where they can be delivered at all times so that the user can train at a desired time. Further, the video data 2A and the audio data 2C may be prepared in a format that can be played on a portable electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone or a stationary electronic device such as a television, like general video software or music software. , DVD, Blu-ray Disc (registered trademark), or the like, and may be provided in a form stored in a recording medium.
- EMS instruction data 2A, video data 2B, and audio data 2C which is an archive of training that was live-streamed in the past or recorded for distribution at a later date. It
- the program control unit 3 includes a training control server 301 and a video server 302 in order to make various adjustments to the training program 2 being executed by the user terminal 12, the device information acquisition unit 108, and the director terminal 12e.
- the training control server 301 includes a training control unit 3011, a synchronization signal generation unit 3012, and a training information transmission unit 3013.
- the video server 302 includes a video control unit 3B, an audio control unit 3C, a synchronization signal generation unit 3021, and a video transmission unit 3022.
- the training control unit 3011 receives an instruction to start training from the director terminal 12e, and generates control data so that electrical stimulation based on the EMS instruction data 2A is applied at a designated timing. Normally, the training control unit 3011 takes in the EMS instruction data 2A stored in the training program 2 as it is and uses it as control data, but when the director terminal 12e performs an operation such as an emergency stop, all or the designated data is specified. The provision of the EMS instruction data 2A to some users is stopped, and the application of electrical stimulation to the users is safely stopped.
- the video control unit 3B constitutes video data to be displayed on the display screen 13 by appropriately combining the default video data stored in the training program 2 and the live video data taken by the camera 109.
- the default video data is mainly displayed during non-training
- the live video data is mainly displayed during training (however, as described above, the live video is displayed on the terminal of the user of the fitness gym 80. You don't have to).
- the voice control unit 3C superimposes the live voice of the fitness gym 80 acquired by the microphone 110 on the default BGM stored in the training program 2 and configures the voice data to be reproduced by the speaker 14 (however, as described above). As you can see, it is not necessary to play live audio on the terminal of the user of fitness gym 80). In an emergency, the director terminal 12e can also play a voice regarding the emergency response.
- the EMS device 102 applies electrical stimulation to the user based on the EMS instruction data adjusted by the training control unit 3011, displays the image on the display screen 13 based on the image data adjusted by the image control unit 3B, and controls the voice.
- the speaker 14 reproduces the sound based on the sound data adjusted by the unit 3C.
- the EMS instruction data 2A and the training control unit 3011 provide the electrical stimulation instruction data providing the electrical stimulation instruction data given by the electrical stimulation device (EMS device 102) worn by the user during training.
- the video data 2B, the camera 109, and the video control unit 3B constitute a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training
- the audio data 2C, the microphone 110, and the audio control unit 3C include the audio data 2C, the microphone 110, and the audio control unit 3C.
- a voice data providing unit that provides voice data that the user hears during training is configured.
- the training information transmission unit 3013 transmits the EMS instruction data that has passed through the training control unit 3011 to the remote user in the personal space 81 via the network 19.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 3012 generates a synchronization signal including time information so that the electrical stimulation instructed by the EMS instruction data is given to the remote user at an appropriate timing.
- the video transmission unit 3022 transmits video data consisting of video data that has passed through the video control unit 3B and audio data that has passed through the audio control unit 3C to a remote user in the personal space 81 via the network 19.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 3021 generates a synchronization signal including time information so that the moving image data is played back to the remote user at an appropriate timing.
- the receiving unit 403 receives various data from the remote user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c via the network 19.
- FIG. 2 shows an example of a synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation units 3012 and 3021 and a transmission signal generated by the transmission units 3013 and 3022.
- the EMS instruction data and the moving image data are each divided into packets having a fixed time length.
- the EMS instruction data indicates two packets EMS Mode # 1 and EMS Mode # 2 as specifying the EMS mode at each time point.
- the EMS instruction data only specifies the preset EMS mode, and the amount of the data is extremely small.
- these EMS instruction data can be collectively transmitted at the start of training (it is not necessary to transmit in real time).
- the moving image data is illustrated as time-continuous packets V # 1, V # 2, .... Since these video data include live video and live audio of the fitness gym 80, they need to be transmitted in real time during training.
- FIG. 2A a synchronization signal is generated at the same timing for the EMS instruction data and the moving image data, and is inserted into the transmission signal. That is, the synchronization signal S including the training start time information is inserted before the EMS Mode # 1 packet and the V # 1 packet, and before the EMS Mode # 2 packet and V # N + 1 after the predetermined time. The synchronization signal S including the time information is inserted into. As a result, even when a transmission delay occurs in the moving image data having a large amount of data, the receiving side can synchronize the EMS instruction data and the moving image data by relying on the synchronization signal S.
- a synchronization signal is generated for each of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data at arbitrary timings and inserted into the transmission signal.
- the synchronization signal S including the training start time information is inserted in common to both data, but thereafter, the synchronization signal is inserted at an arbitrary timing.
- the synchronization signal corresponding to the switching timing needs to be inserted.
- the time information of the start timing of each set may be inserted as a synchronization signal.
- the frequency of inserting the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data may be low.
- it is preferable to insert a synchronization signal with high frequency in the moving image data that changes from moment to moment for example, it is inserted at a frequency of 1 second, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and the like.
- the insertion frequency and insertion timing of the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data are different, but since the synchronization signal includes the time information, the receiving side can synchronize without any problem. For example, if the training start time is 14:00 and the remote user joins at around 14:05 with a delay, the synchronization signal of the video data inserted with high frequency is first searched. Then, when the synchronization signal of the moving image data at 14:05 is found, the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data before 14:05 is subsequently searched. Since the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data is infrequent, it is assumed that the synchronization signal of 14:00 is found by going back to the training start time.
- the remote user's EMS device 102 reads out the electrical stimulation data to be applied at 14:05, 5 minutes after the synchronization signal at 14:00, and applies the electrical stimulation to the user. ..
- the electrical stimulus to be applied at 14:05 and the video to be played at 14:05 are synchronized.
- such a synchronization process may cause a time difference with the instructor of the fitness gym 80 and other users, it does not pose a big problem because the frequency of inserting the synchronization signal of the moving image data can be suppressed to about several seconds at most. Even if there is a delay to the instructor or another user, the user is unaware that there is a delay because the packets received by that user are synchronized.
- both the training control server 301 and the video server 302 are installed in the fitness gym 80, but all or part of the functions of each server are realized by a cloud server or the like on the network 19. You may.
- the communication unit 5 communicates with the training control server 301, the video server 302, and the reception unit 403 of the fitness gym 80 via the network 19 in the personal space 81 where the remote user is located.
- the communication unit 5 includes a data synchronization unit 501, a reception unit 502, and a transmission unit 503. These functions of the communication unit 5 can be realized by a user terminal 12c composed of a general-purpose communication device such as a tablet or a smartphone.
- the receiving unit 502 receives the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data to which the synchronization signal is added, which are transmitted from the transmitting units 3013 and 3022.
- the data synchronization unit 501 synchronizes the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the received synchronization signal.
- the transmission unit 503 transmits various data from the user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c to the reception unit 403.
- the data synchronization unit 501 performs the reverse processing of the processing shown in FIG. 2 based on the received synchronization signal. That is, regardless of which of the signals of FIGS. 2A and 2B is received, the synchronization signal S of each of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data is specified, and the synchronization signals S are collated with each other to identify the EMS instruction data and the moving image data. Performs synchronization processing to arrange each packet of the above at the appropriate provision timing. In this way, it becomes possible to provide synchronized electrical stimulation (EMS device 102c), video (display screen 13c), and voice (speaker 14c) to a user in a remote personal space 81. As described above with respect to FIG.
- EMS instruction data data specifying the EMS mode at each time point is communicated via the network 19, and the EMS device 102c that receives the data determines the frequency and intensity of electrical stimulation. Generate specific instruction data.
- the function of the electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides the electrical stimulation instruction data given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training is not limited to the EMS instruction data 2A on the transmitting side and the training control unit 3011. , It is also realized in the EMS device 102c on the receiving side.
- the motion control system 100 has been outlined with reference to FIG. 1, but each component will be described in detail.
- FIG. 3 schematically shows the appearance of fitness wear, which is an example of the EMS device 102 worn by the user during training.
- the fitness wear 102 is composed of a combination of an upper body garment portion 120 that can be worn by the user on the upper body and a lower body garment portion 122 that can be worn by the user on the lower body.
- the upper body garment portion 120 is a front-opening short-sleeved outerwear, and the front is opened and closed by a front fastener 130 provided at a position along the median line.
- the upper body garment portion 120 and the lower body garment portion 122 are garments having a shape that can be worn on the body and are made of a chemical fiber fabric that is an electrically insulating fabric, regardless of the wearer's body shape.
- the upper body garment section 120 and the lower body garment section 122 are worn directly on the skin without wearing any innerwear.
- a plurality of electrodes are provided on the back surfaces of the upper body garment portion 120 and the lower body garment portion 122. The arrangement of each electrode will be described later.
- a right arm fastener 131 is provided on the outside of the right sleeve from the cuffs to the shoulders, and a left arm fastener 132 is provided on the outside of the left sleeve from the cuffs to the shoulders. By closing the right arm fastener 131 and the left arm fastener 132, the sleeve circumference can be fitted to the arm more tightly.
- Non-slip rubber material is attached to the back side of the left and right cuffs along the inner circumference of the cuffs to prevent the cuffs from rolling up or rolling up during exercise.
- a right side fastener 133 is provided on the right side from the hem to the armpit, and a left side fastener 134 is also provided on the left side from the hem to the armpit. By closing the right side zipper 133 and the left side zipper 134, the hem circumference can be fitted tightly to the waist circumference.
- a non-slip rubber material is also attached to the back side around the hem along the inner circumference of the hem to prevent the hem from rolling up or rolling up during exercise.
- a right leg fastener 135 is provided on the outside of the right leg from the hem to the right hip, and a left leg fastener 136 is also provided on the outside of the left leg from the hem to the left hip.
- the hem circumference can be fitted to the leg more tightly.
- Non-slip rubber material is also attached to the back of the left and right hem along the inner circumference of the hem to prevent the hem from rolling up or rolling up during exercise.
- the degree of closing (opening degree) of each fastener the degree of fit to the body can be adjusted according to the user's preference and body shape.
- the upper body control unit 124 is attached to the position on the front side from the right side of the upper body clothing unit 120.
- the lower body control unit 126 is attached to the position on the front side of the left leg of the lower body garment portion 122.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 control the voltage applied to each electrode.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are attached so as to be exposed to the outside as independent units separated into an upper body and a lower body. By separating the control unit for the upper body and the lower body, it is possible to train the upper body and the lower body with different exercise intensities (set voltage values), and depending on the user, the muscle electric stimulator for the upper body and the muscle electric stimulator for the lower body.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 can be linked by pairing by short-range wireless communication at the time of activation. In that case, if one of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 is operated, the other is also interlocked, and the electric stimulator for the upper body and the lower body can be collectively controlled.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are controlled by the control application installed in the information terminal by pairing with the information terminal (tablet, smartphone, etc.) as the user terminal 12 by short-range wireless communication at the time of activation. You can also receive.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 can be operated separately or collectively. Further, since the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are attached to the left and right positions with the median line in between, they are located diagonally on the front surface of the body. Therefore, even when the body is bent forward or the thighs or knees are lifted upward, it is possible to prevent the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 from colliding with each other and interfering with each other.
- FIG. 4 schematically shows the arrangement and wiring of electrodes in the upper body clothing portion of fitness wear.
- FIG. 4A shows the front side of the upper body garment portion 120
- FIG. 4B shows the back side of the upper body garment portion 120.
- the upper body garment portion 120 has a multi-layer structure in which each electrode is arranged on the back surface of the fabric and at least a part of the fabric is overlapped with the outer material and the lining, and an electric cable is wired between the outer material and the lining.
- Ru Electric cables are water resistant and stretchable. Since the arrangement and wiring of the electrodes and the electric cables do not actually appear in the appearance, they will be described by drawing them with broken lines.
- the electrode parts on the back surface of the upper body clothing part 120 are a plurality of places corresponding to the target body parts to which electrical stimulation should be applied, and are the parts corresponding to each body part such as the user's abdomen, flank, and arm. Each electrode is provided at a position separated between these electrodes so that a predetermined body part can be energized.
- the plurality of electrodes are electrically connected to the first control unit connection portion 20a by individual electric cables 36.
- the first control unit connection unit 20a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper body control unit 124 in FIG. 3, and when the upper body control unit 124 is attached to the first control unit connection unit 20a, the first control unit connection unit is connected.
- the portion 20a and the upper body control unit 124 are electrically connected.
- the plurality of electric cables 36 connected to each electrode have elasticity and are entwined with a cable fastening tape 49 sewn to the upper body garment portion 120 in front of each electrode to fix the position of the upper body garment. Even when the electric cable 36 is pulled following the expansion and contraction of the portion 120, the electric cable 36 is prevented from coming off from each electrode.
- a first electrode portion 30a is provided on the right and a second electrode portion 30b is provided on the left as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the rectus abdominis muscle on the left and right.
- Electrical stimulation is applied to the rectus abdominis muscle by applying a voltage from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via 36b.
- a first cable fastening tape 49a is sewn in front of the first electrode portion 30a, and the first electric cable 36a connecting the first electrode portion 30a and the first control unit connecting portion 20a is entwined with the first cable fastening tape 49a. And fix the position.
- a second cable fastening tape 49b is sewn in front of the second electrode portion 30b, and the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side passes from the second electrode portion 30b of the left abdominal muscle through the left flank, back, and right flank.
- the second electric cable 36b to be wired to is entwined with the second cable fastening tape 49b to fix the position.
- a third electrode portion 30c is provided on the front side and a fourth electrode portion 30d is provided on the back side as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the right abdominal oblique muscle in the anterior-posterior direction.
- a voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the fourth electric cable 36d to apply electrical stimulation to the right abdominal oblique muscle.
- a third cable fastening tape 49c is sewn in front of the third electrode portion 30c, and a third electric cable 36c connecting the third electrode portion 30c and the first control unit connecting portion 20a is entwined with the third cable fastening tape 49c. And fix the position.
- a fourth cable fastening tape 49d is sewn in front of the fourth electrode portion 30d, and is wired from the fourth electrode portion 30d on the back side to the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side through the right flank.
- the electric cable 36d is entwined with the fourth cable fastening tape 49d to fix the position.
- a fifth electrode portion 30e is provided on the front side and a sixth electrode portion 30f is provided on the back side as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the left abdominal oblique muscle in the anterior-posterior direction.
- the left abdominal oblique muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the sixth electric cable 36f.
- the fifth electric cable 36e is connected to the fourth electrode portion 30d from the fifth electrode portion 30e on the left flank on the front side through the back, and thus the first control unit connection portion is connected via the fourth electrode portion 30d. It is electrically connected to 20a.
- a fifth cable fastening tape 49e is sewn in front of the fifth electrode portion 30e, and the fifth electric cable 36e is entwined with the fifth cable fastening tape 49e to fix the position. Further, the fifth electric cable 36e is also entwined with the fourth cable fastening tape 49d sewn in front of the fourth electrode portion 30d to fix the position.
- a sixth cable fastening tape 49f is sewn in front of the sixth electrode portion 30f, and the sixth electrode portion 30f on the left flank on the back side passes through the back and right flank to the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side. The sixth electric cable 36f to be wired is entwined with the sixth cable fastening tape 49f to fix the position.
- the 7th electrode portion 30g is on the upper side (front side) and the 8th electrode is on the lower side (back side) as a pair of negative and positive electrodes that sandwich the right triceps and triceps muscles from above and below.
- a portion 30h is provided, and a voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the 7th electric cable 36g and the 8th electric cable 36h, respectively, to the right triceps brachii muscle and triceps brachii muscle. Gives electrical stimulation.
- the 7th electrode portion 30g and the 8th electrode portion 30h sandwich the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle from above and below, but the electrode size is not increased more than necessary, and the 7th electrode portion 30g has two upper arms.
- the eighth electrode portion 30h is placed at a position shifted in the anterior direction (elbow direction) from the most raised part of the muscle, and the eighth electrode portion 30h is placed at a position shifted in the posterior direction (shoulder direction) from the most raised part of the triceps brachii muscle. ing.
- a 7th cable fastening tape 49g is sewn in front of the 7th electrode portion 30g, and a 7th electric cable is wired from the 7th electrode portion 30g through the right armpit on the front side to the 1st control unit connection portion 20a. 36g is entwined with 49g of the 7th cable fastening tape to fix the position.
- An eighth cable fastening tape 49h is sewn in front of the eighth electrode portion 30h, and an eighth electric cable is wired from the eighth electrode portion 30h to the first control unit connection portion 20a through the right armpit on the back side.
- the 36h is entwined with the 8th cable fastening tape 49h to fix the position.
- the 9th electrode portion 30i is on the upper side (front side) and the 10th electrode is on the lower side (back side) as a pair of negative and positive electrodes that sandwich the left triceps and triceps muscles from above and below.
- a portion 30j is provided, and a voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the 9th electric cable 36i and the 10th electric cable 36j, respectively, to the left triceps brachii muscle and triceps brachii muscle. Gives electrical stimulation.
- the 9th electrode portion 30i and the 10th electrode portion 30j sandwich the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle from above and below, but the electrode size is not increased more than necessary, and the 9th electrode portion 30i has two upper arms.
- the tenth electrode portion 30j is placed at a position shifted in the anterior direction (elbow direction) from the most raised part of the muscle, and the tenth electrode portion 30j is placed at a position shifted in the posterior direction (shoulder direction) from the most raised part of the triceps brachii muscle. ing.
- a ninth cable fastening tape 49i is sewn in front of the ninth electrode portion 30i, and the first one on the front side passes through the left flank, the back, and the right flank from the ninth electrode portion 30i through the left armpit on the front side.
- the ninth electric cable 36i wired to the control unit connection portion 20a is entwined with the ninth cable fastening tape 49i to fix the position.
- a tenth cable fastening tape 49j is sewn in front of the tenth electrode portion 30j.
- the tenth electric cable 36j wired to the control unit connection portion 20a is entwined with the tenth cable fastening tape 49j to fix the position.
- the second electric cable 36b for connecting the first control unit connection portion 20a, the fourth electric cable 36d for connecting the fifth electrode portion 30e and the fourth electrode portion 30d, the sixth electrode portion 30f and the first control unit connection portion 20a are connected.
- the five electric cables 36 of the sixth electric cable 36f to be connected are wired from the back side to the front side through the vicinity of the center of the back and the right flank.
- a cable fastening tape 59a for bundling these five electric cables 36 is arranged near the center of the back, and the cable fastening tape 59a bundles the five electric cables 36 near the center of the back.
- the cable fastening tape 59a may be sewn and fixed near the center of the back of the upper body garment portion 120.
- the electric cable can be wired without being exposed to the outside. Further, since the configurations other than the upper body control unit 124 have water resistance, the fitness wear 102 can be washed as it is without removing the electrode portion 30 and the electric cable 36 only by removing the upper body control unit 124.
- the upper body garment portion 120 shows an example in which electrodes are mainly arranged for men, but the arrangement and size of the electrodes may be different for women.
- FIG. 5 schematically shows the arrangement and wiring of electrodes in the lower body clothing portion of fitness wear.
- FIG. 5A shows the front side of the lower body garment portion 122
- FIG. 5B shows the back side of the lower body garment portion 122.
- the lower body garment portion 122 has a multi-layer structure in which electrodes are arranged on the back surface of the fabric and at least a part of the fabric is overlapped with the outer material and the lining, and an electric cable is wired between the outer material and the lining.
- Ru Electric cables are water resistant and stretchable. Since the arrangement and wiring of the electrodes and the electric cables do not actually appear in the appearance, they will be described by drawing them with broken lines.
- the electrode parts on the back surface of the lower body clothing part 122 are a plurality of parts corresponding to the target body parts to which electrical stimulation should be applied, and are the parts corresponding to each body part such as the user's legs and buttocks.
- the plurality of electrodes are electrically connected to the second control unit connection portion 20b by individual electric cables 36.
- the second control unit connection unit 20b is provided at a position corresponding to the lower body control unit 126 in FIG. 3, and when the lower body control unit 126 is attached to the second control unit connection unit 20b, the second control unit is connected.
- the unit 20b and the lower body control unit 126 are electrically connected.
- the plurality of electric cables 36 connected to each electrode have elasticity and are entwined with a cable fastening tape 49 sewn to the lower body garment portion 122 in front of each electrode to fix the position of the lower body garment. Even when the electric cable 36 is pulled following the expansion and contraction of the portion 122, the electric cable 36 is prevented from coming off from each electrode.
- the 11th electrode portion 30k is provided at the upper part and the 12th electrode portion 30l is provided at the lower part as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the right quadriceps muscle up and down, and the 11th electric cable 36k respectively.
- the right quadriceps muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 12th electric cable 36l.
- the eleventh electric cable 36k is connected to the thirteenth electrode portion 30m of the left front thigh from the eleventh electrode portion 30k of the right front thigh through the crotch, and thus the second control unit connection portion is connected via the thirteenth electrode portion 30m. It is electrically connected to 20b.
- the eleventh cable fastening tape 49k is sewn in front of the eleventh electrode portion 30k, and the eleventh electric cable 36k is entwined with the eleventh cable fastening tape 49k to fix the position.
- the 12th electric cable 36l is connected to the 14th electrode portion 30n of the left front thigh from the 12th electrode portion 30l of the right front thigh through the crotch, and thus the second control unit connection portion is connected via the 14th electrode portion 30n. It is electrically connected to 20b.
- a twelfth cable fastening tape 49l is sewn in front of the twelfth electrode portion 30l, and the twelfth electric cable 36l is entwined with the twelfth cable fastening tape 49l to fix the position.
- a 13th electrode portion 30m is provided at the upper part and a 14th electrode portion 30n is provided at the lower part as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the left quadriceps muscle up and down, and the 13th electric cable 36m, respectively.
- the left quadriceps muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 14th electric cable 36n.
- a thirteenth cable fastening tape 49m is sewn in front of the thirteenth electrode portion 30m, and the thirteenth electric cable 36m and the eleventh electric cable 36k connecting the thirteenth electrode portion 30m and the second control unit connection portion 20b are sewn to the thirteenth.
- a 14th cable fastening tape 49n is sewn in front of the 14th electrode portion 30n, and the 14th electric cable 36n and the 12th electric cable 36l connecting the 14th electrode portion 30n and the second control unit connecting portion 20b are connected to the 14th. Entangled with the cable fastening tape 49n and fixed in position.
- a 15th electrode portion 30o is provided at the upper part and a 16th electrode portion 30p is provided at the lower part as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the hamstrings such as the right biceps femoris up and down.
- electrical stimulation is applied to the ham strings such as the right biceps femoris.
- the 15th electric cable 36o is connected to the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh from the 15th electrode portion 30o on the back of the right thigh through the crotch, and the second control unit is connected to the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b.
- a fifteenth cable fastening tape 49o is sewn in front of the fifteenth electrode portion 30o, and the fifteenth electric cable 36o is entwined with the fifteenth cable fastening tape 49o to fix the position.
- the 16th electric cable 36p is connected to the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh from the 16th electrode portion 30p on the back of the right thigh through the crotch, and the second control unit is connected to the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b.
- the 16th cable fastening tape 49p is sewn in front of the 16th electrode portion 30p, and the 16th electric cable 36p is entwined with the 16th cable fastening tape 49r to fix the position.
- a 17th electrode portion 30q is provided at the upper part and an 18th electrode portion 30r is provided at the lower part as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the hamstrings such as the left biceps femoris up and down.
- electrical stimulation is applied to the ham strings such as the left biceps femoris.
- the 17th cable fastening tape 49q is sewn in front of the 17th electrode portion 30q, and the 17th electric cable 36q and the 17th electric cable 36q connecting the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh to the second control unit connecting portion 20b on the left front thigh.
- the electric cable 36o is entwined with the 17th cable fastening tape 49q to fix the position.
- the 18th cable fastening tape 49r is sewn in front of the 18th electrode portion 30r, and the 18th electric cable 36r and the 18th electric cable 36r connecting the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh and the second control unit connecting portion 20b on the left front thigh are sewn.
- the 16 electric cable 36p is entwined with the 18th cable fastening tape 49r to fix the position.
- the 19th electrode 30s near the upper outer gluteus maximus and the lower inner gluteus maximus as a pair of yin-yang electrodes that straddle the right gluteus maximus and gluteus maxims up and down.
- the 20th electrode portion 30t is provided, and the right gluteus maximus and gluteus maxims muscles are provided by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 19th electric cable 36s and the 20th electric cable 36t, respectively. Gives electrical stimulation to.
- the 19th electric cable 36s is connected to the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left buttock from the 19th electrode portion 30s of the right buttock through the center of the upper buttock, and thus the second control unit is connected to the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left buttock portion via the 21st electrode portion 30u. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b.
- the 19th cable fastening tape 49s is sewn in front of the 19th electrode portion 30s, and the 19th electric cable 36s is entwined with the 19th cable fastening tape 49s to fix the position.
- the 20th electric cable 36t is connected to the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left buttock from the 20th electrode portion 30t of the right buttock through the center of the upper buttock, and thus the second control unit is connected to the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left buttock. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b.
- a 20th cable fastening tape 49t is sewn in front of the 20th electrode portion 30t, and the 20th electric cable 36t is entwined with the 20th cable fastening tape 49t to fix the position.
- the 21st electrode part 30u near the upper outer gluteus maximus muscle and the lower inner gluteus maximus muscle as a pair of yin and yang electrodes that straddle the left gluteus maximus and gluteus maxims up and down.
- the 22nd electrode portion 30v is provided, and the left gluteus maximus and gluteus maxims muscles are provided by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 21st electric cable 36u and the 22nd electric cable 36v, respectively. Gives electrical stimulation to.
- a 21st cable fastening tape 49u is sewn in front of the 21st electrode portion 30u, and a 21st electric cable 36u connecting the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left gluteus maximus to the 2nd control unit connection portion 20b of the left front thigh.
- the 19th electric cable 36s is entwined with the 21st cable fastening tape 49u to fix the position.
- a 22nd cable fastening tape 49v is sewn in front of the 22nd electrode portion 30v, and a 22nd electric cable 36v connecting the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left gluteus maximus to the 2nd control unit connection portion 20b of the left front thigh.
- the 20th electric cable 36t is entwined with the 22nd cable fastening tape 49v to fix the position.
- the cable fastening tape 59b for fixing the 15th electric cable 36o connecting the electrode portion 30q and the 16th electric cable 36p connecting the 16th electrode portion 30p and the 18th electrode portion 30r is attached to the crotch of the lower body garment portion 122. It is sewn to a fabric in the vicinity, and four electric cables 36 are bundled and fixed in the vicinity of the crotch by the cable fastening tape 59b.
- Cable fastening tape 59c for fixing the 19th electric cable 36s connecting the 19th electrode portion 30s and the 21st electrode portion 30u and the 20th electric cable 36t connecting the 20th electrode portion 30t and the 22nd electrode portion 30v. Is sewn to the fabric near the center of the upper buttock of the lower body garment portion 122, and the two electric cables 36 are bundled by the cable fastening tape 59c and fixed near the center of the upper buttock portion.
- the electric cable can be wired without being exposed to the outside. Further, since the configurations other than the lower body control unit 126 have water resistance, the fitness wear 102 can be washed as it is without removing the electrode portion 30 and the electric cable 36 only by removing the lower body control unit 126.
- the lower body garment portion 122 also shows an example in which electrodes are arranged mainly for men, but the arrangement and size of the electrodes may be different for women.
- the fitness wear 102 described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5 is usually worn on the spot for training when training at the fitness gym 80, and is returned after the training. ..
- the user himself / herself can prepare the fitness wear 102 before training and perform maintenance such as washing the fitness wear 102 after training by following the following procedure. ..
- the upper body control unit 124 is removed from the upper body garment unit 120, and the lower body control unit 126 is removed from the lower body garment unit 122. Then, open all the fasteners and take off the fitness wear 102.
- the removed fitness wear 102 can be washed in a washing machine or the like as it is.
- the fitness wear 102 When the fitness wear 102 is washed by the individual user, it can be washed by any method while paying attention to the following points so as not to impair the function and performance of the fitness wear 102.
- the washing method is arbitrary, but it is preferable to put the fitness wear 120 in a washing net for delicate washing or hand washing so that an excessive load is not applied during washing.
- the detergent preferably does not damage the fitness wear 120, for example, a neutral detergent for clothing may be used.
- a neutral detergent for clothing may be used.
- the hand squeezing is weak, and in the case of centrifugal dehydration, squeezing is performed in a short time to reduce the burden on the fitness wear 120.
- After dehydration it is preferable not to leave it wet and to dry it in the shade away from direct sunlight, and it is preferable to avoid using a tumble dryer or an iron.
- when cleaning be careful not to rub the electrodes strongly and do not wipe with thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
- FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control unit.
- the control unit 128 includes a power supply unit 22, a control unit 28, and a wireless communication unit 58.
- the power supply unit 22, the control unit 28, and the wireless communication unit 58 are housed in a housing having a shape that can be attached to the control unit connection unit 20.
- the control unit 28 includes a power supply control unit 50, an energization detection unit 52, an electrical stimulation control unit 54, and a setting unit 56.
- the control unit 128 includes an upper body control unit 124 attached to the upper body garment unit 120 and a lower body control unit 126 attached to the lower body garment unit 122, each of which has the same configuration. However, as a modification, there may be a difference in configuration or shape between the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126.
- Each block of the control unit 28 can be realized by an element such as an integrated circuit or a mechanical device in terms of hardware, and is realized by a computer program or the like in terms of software, but here, it is realized by their cooperation. I'm drawing a functional block. Therefore, it is understood by those skilled in the art who have touched this specification that these functional blocks can be realized in various forms by combining hardware and software. The same applies to the other block diagrams thereafter.
- the power supply unit 22 is a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, but may be a replaceable primary battery.
- the power supply unit 22 is electrically connected to a wireless communication module as a wireless communication unit 58 and a control circuit as a control unit 28, and supplies electric power to each of them.
- the control unit 128 may be provided with a power button, and the power supply unit 22 may be turned on / off according to the operation of the power button.
- the power supply control unit 50 controls the charging of the power supply unit 22 and transmits information indicating the charging state to the user terminal 12 via the wireless communication unit 58.
- the energization detection unit 52 detects the resistance value between the electrodes of the anode and the cathode in order to detect whether or not energization is possible between the electrodes.
- the energization detection unit 52 of the upper body control unit 124 is located between the first electrode portion 30a and the second electrode portion 30b corresponding to the abdominal muscle, and between the third electrode portion 30c and the fourth electrode portion 30d corresponding to the right flank.
- the energization detection unit 52 of the lower body control unit 126 is located between the 11th electrode portion 30k and the 12th electrode portion 30l corresponding to the right front thigh, and between the 13th electrode portion 30m and the 14th electrode portion 30n corresponding to the left front thigh.
- the energization detection unit 52 detects that energization is possible when the detected resistance value is less than the threshold value, and detects that energization is not possible when the detected resistance value is equal to or more than the threshold value.
- the electrical stimulation control unit 54 When the electrical stimulation control unit 54 is detected by the energization detection unit 52 as being energizable, the electrical stimulation control unit 54 applies a set voltage between the electrodes of the anode and the cathode at a predetermined operation time and a predetermined cycle defined by the training program 2 or the like. .. That is, electrical stimulation is applied to a place where each electrode is arranged, for example, the user's abdomen, flank, arm, leg, buttocks and the like.
- the setting unit 56 sets the voltage value controlled by the electrical stimulation control unit 54 and its increase / decrease according to a predetermined training program or EMS mode.
- the set voltage value any value can be set, for example, as the intensity in 20 steps.
- the setting unit 56 also has a built-in training program to be executed independently and an EMS mode, and is a remote control unit connected via wireless communication (for example, a mobile phone).
- a mobile phone By operating the information terminal such as, and the control application installed on the terminal, the training program or the execution of the EMS mode can be started.
- the wireless communication unit 58 receives information such as a set voltage from the user terminal 12 via short-range wireless communication and sends it to the setting unit 56.
- the setting unit 56 applies the set voltage value based on the received information. Increase or decrease. For example, in the voltage value setting work before the start of exercise, each time the set voltage value is increased or decreased, the electrical stimulation control unit 54 applies a voltage between the electrodes at a new set voltage value to obtain a new set voltage. Let the user experience and confirm the value, that is, the exercise intensity.
- the wireless communication unit 58 When the wireless communication unit 58 receives an instruction to increase / decrease the exercise intensity from the user terminal 12 during exercise, that is, even while the voltage is applied, the wireless communication unit 58 sends information on the increased / decreased set voltage to the setting unit 56, and the setting unit 56 sends the set voltage value. Increase or decrease. However, even if an exercise intensity increase / decrease instruction is received from a user terminal other than the connected user terminal 12, it is ignored and does not follow the exercise intensity increase / decrease instruction from another device. This is to prevent the voltage value from being arbitrarily increased or decreased by someone other than the user.
- the wireless communication unit 58 may transmit information indicating a voltage application state by the electrical stimulation control unit 54, that is, an exercise execution state, to the user terminal 12.
- the control unit 128 may be provided with a pairing button, and the wireless communication unit 58 may establish a wireless communication connection when the pairing button is turned on.
- the wireless communication unit 58 may be connected to the wireless communication unit 58 included in another control unit by pairing via short-range wireless communication. That is, the wireless communication unit 58 of the upper body control unit 124 and the wireless communication unit 58 of the lower body control unit 126 may be wirelessly connected, and one may be linked by transferring information such as a set voltage value to the other.
- the set voltage value is transferred from the wireless communication unit 58 of the upper body control unit 124 to the wireless communication unit 58 of the lower body control unit 126.
- the EMS device 102 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6. Subsequently, the bike 103 used for training at the same time as the EMS device 102 will be described.
- FIG. 7 shows one configuration example of the motorcycle 103.
- the bike 103A shown in this figure is more than a saddle 1031 on which the user sits, a handle 1032 held by the user, a pedal 1033 that the user pedals, a wheel 1034 that is rotationally driven according to the pedal 1033, and a wheel 1034. It is provided with a light emitting portion 1035 having a substantially circular shape having a large diameter and arranged in such a manner that the wheels 1034 are substantially inscribed, and a frame 1036 having a shape surrounding the light emitting portion 1035 and connecting and supporting each of the above members.
- the user who trains on the bike 103A sits on the saddle 1031 while wearing the EMS device 102, grips the handle 1032, and trains to pedal the pedal 1033.
- the load of the pedal 1033 can be adjusted by the load adjusting lever 1037, and the user can set a desired load for training.
- the load adjusting lever 1037 sets a load in eight stages according to its position, and the position closer to the saddle 1031 has a lower load, and the position closer to the handle 1032 has a higher load.
- the bike 103A is configured to be able to communicate with the user terminal 12 by wire or wirelessly, and may be configured to adjust the load through application software or the like installed on the user terminal 12.
- the rotation of the pedal 1033 during training is constantly measured by a sensor (not shown), and various data (rotation speed, speed, mileage, output) indicating the training performance of the bike 103A itself or the user terminal 12 capable of communicating with the bike 103A are shown. It is used to calculate the calories burned.
- These performance data are collected by the device information acquisition unit 108 together with the load stage data.
- a wheel 1034 having a so-called freewheel structure so that the rotation of the pedal 1033 measured by the sensor accurately represents the amount of movement of the user.
- the wheel 1034 of the freewheel structure when the user stops pedaling the pedal 1033, the wheel 1034 continues to rotate by coasting, but the rotation of the pedal 1033 stops immediately.
- the rotation of the pedal 1033 in a wheel having a so-called load direct connection structure, even if the user stops pedaling the pedal 1033, not only the wheel 1034 but also the pedal 1033 itself continues to rotate by inertia.
- the rotation of the pedal 1033 accurately represents the momentum of the user, so that accurate data sharing between the instructor and the user at a distant place becomes possible.
- the user ranking is created based on this data, its fairness can be guaranteed.
- the light emitting unit 1035 is composed of a large number of light emitting elements such as LEDs arranged continuously along its substantially circumference, and emits light in a substantially circular shape in different modes depending on the rotational state of the pedal 1033.
- the bike 103A provided with such a light emitting unit 1035 is particularly suitable to be installed in the fitness gym 80.
- FIG. 8 shows how a plurality of users train on the bike 103A at the fitness gym 80.
- an instructor who provides training guidance is also riding the bike 103A.
- a plurality of bikes 103A are arranged in an orderly manner in the training area in front of the stage, and each user trains on the assigned bike 103A. Since the lighting is set to be dark as an effect during training, it is easy to see how the light emitting unit 1035 of each user's motorcycle 103A emits light in different modes according to the rotation speed.
- the instructor can immediately grasp the situation of each user from the light emitting state, and can give necessary guidance and scolding encouragement in a timely manner. Further, the user who participates in the training from the remote personal space 81 can confirm the image of the fitness gym 80 taken by the camera 109 on the display screen 13. At this time, as in the case of the instructor, the remote user can visually grasp the rotation speed of other users in the fitness gym 80 from the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 1035 of each bike 103A, and is stimulated from there. You can continue training with high motivation and competitiveness.
- FIG. 9 shows another configuration example of the bike 103.
- the bike 103B shown in this figure has a different design from the bike 103A shown in FIG. 7, but basically has the same configuration and function, and the description thereof will be omitted.
- the light emitting unit 1035 provided on the motorcycle 103A is not provided on the motorcycle 103B.
- the bike 103 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9.
- hybrid training that combines involuntary movements by the former and voluntary movements by the latter is performed. It can be performed. 10 and 11 show the excellent effect of such hybrid training.
- FIG. 10 shows the voluntary movement (Vol) in which the intensity of each physical activity is shown in the graph on the left side, the involuntary movement (EMS) by electrical stimulation, and the hybrid training (Vol + EMS) by the combination of both. It shows the change in blood lactate level before and after.
- Mets which is a unit of physical activity intensity in the graph on the left, shows the intensity of physical activity at a magnification of 1 at rest. For example, normal walking is about 3 Mets. Involuntary movements do not move the body by themselves, so the physical activity intensity is low (1.0 Mets strength). In addition, low-intensity strength training was adopted as a voluntary exercise in this experiment (about 3.0 Mets). In the hybrid training, electrical stimulation was applied when performing the same strength training as the voluntary movement.
- the frequency of the electrical stimulation applied during involuntary movements and hybrid training was mainly 20 Hz, which is suitable for strength training. Looking at the graph of blood lactate level on the right side, an increase in blood lactate level can be seen after exercise in any exercise, but hybrid training is prominent. In particular, when comparing voluntary exercise and hybrid training, although the difference in physical activity intensity in the graph on the left is slight, there is a marked difference in the amount of increase in blood lactate level in the graph on the right. As described above, it can be seen that the hybrid training that combines the voluntary movement and the involuntary movement has an excellent training effect as compared with the voluntary movement alone.
- FIG. 11 shows changes in oxygen consumption and changes in blood lactate levels when exercise intensity is changed for voluntary exercise only (VOL) and hybrid training (VOL + EMS).
- VOL voluntary exercise only
- VOL + EMS hybrid training
- the user is encouraged to wear the EMS device 102 during aerobic exercise using the bike 103, and effective hybrid training is realized. Further, the effect of hybrid training can be obtained by encouraging the wearing of the EMS device 102 even during training that does not use the bike 103, for example, strength training under the guidance of an instructor, stretching, or light voluntary exercise such as yoga.
- the configuration of the motion control system 100 has been described in detail above. He also explained the excellent effects of hybrid training that can be performed by the user based on these configurations. Subsequently, regarding specific processing when the training program 2 is executed by the exercise control system 100, the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as the user terminal 12), the instructor terminal 12d, and the director terminal 12e. This will be explained by showing an example of each screen of.
- FIG. 12 shows an example of a training explanation screen displayed to each of the user, the instructor, and the director before the start of training.
- 12 (A) is a training explanation screen displayed on the user terminal 12
- FIG. 12 (B) is a training explanation screen displayed on the instructor terminal 12d
- FIG. 12 (C) is displayed on the director terminal 12e. This is the training explanation screen. Since the screen contents are almost the same, the user screen of FIG. 12 (A) will be described in detail, and only when there is a difference between the instructor screen of FIG. 12 (B) and the director screen of FIG. 12 (C) will be mentioned.
- the training start time (START: 19:00), training type (bike
- Training details, EMS mode, preparation start button, etc. are displayed.
- the training start time is displayed for live training delivery or archive delivery with a specified start time. It is not displayed in the case of VOD distribution that can be viewed by the user at a desired time.
- the training type indicates a type using the bike 103, strength training without using the bike 103, stretching, yoga, and the like.
- the EMS mode displays the mode of electrical stimulation for each set of training. The training shown is divided into three sets.
- the user can select either the TRAD mode centered on the frequency of 20 Hz or the SPOT mode in which the frequencies of 20 Hz and 4 Hz are appropriately interwoven.
- the TRAD mode centered on the frequency of 20 Hz is specified in advance.
- a logout button is provided in the upper right corner of the instructor screen in Fig. 12 (B). This is because the same terminal may be shared by multiple instructors and directors, so that the user of the terminal can be switched as appropriate. Further, the training details information is the same as the user screen of FIG. 12A, but if it is desired to modify the content, the separately registered master information may be modified.
- FIG. 12 (C) On the director screen of FIG. 12 (C), information on distribution settings is displayed instead of the training details of FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B). "Yes” and “None” are displayed depending on the presence or absence of live distribution, and “Yes” and “None” are displayed depending on the presence or absence of VOD recording for distribution at a later date.
- This distribution setting information is input by a person in charge such as a program creation staff, an instructor, or a director when the training program 2 is created, and can be changed as necessary before the start of training.
- the director presses the preparation start button at the bottom of the screen at the start of training the acceptance of users of the fitness gym 80 and the personal space 81 is started.
- FIG. 13 to 15 show a screen in which the user terminal 12 transitions after the preparation start button is pressed on the user screen of FIG. 12 (A). These screens set the EMS device 102 to be worn by the user at the start of training.
- FIG. 13A is a screen for setting the cooperation (synchronization setting) between the upper body control unit 124, which is described as the Top controller, and the lower body control unit 126, which is described as the Bottom controller. As instructed on the screen, both units are linked by pressing and holding the sync buttons 1241 and 1261 on each unit at the same time.
- FIG. 13B is a screen for pairing the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 linked in FIG. 13A with the application software installed on the user terminal 12.
- pairing start button at the bottom of the screen is pressed, pairing is executed via short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).
- short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).
- the pairing completion screen as shown in FIG. 13C is displayed.
- FIG. 14A is an instruction screen for attaching the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 to the upper body garment unit 120 and the lower body garment unit 122, respectively.
- the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 which are collectively referred to as controllers in this figure, to the first control unit connection unit 20a and the second control unit connection unit 20b whose positions are indicated on the screen, electricity is obtained. It is possible to apply electrical stimulation by controlling the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126.
- 14 (B) and 14 (C) are screens showing the EMS mode, that is, the frequency mainly used for electrical stimulation during training.
- the user can select the EMS mode of each set of training from the plurality of prepared options.
- the EMS mode of each set during training is specified in advance, and the information is displayed.
- FIG. 15A is a screen for setting the EMS level, that is, the intensity of electrical stimulation during training.
- the EMS level can be selected from 20 levels, and can be individually set for the upper body garment section 120 and the lower body garment section 122. As will be described later, the EMS level can be changed from the screen during training.
- the screen transitions to the training preparation completion screen of FIG. 15B, and the outline of the training program to be started and the setting information (EMS level and EMS mode) of the EMS device 102 are simplified. Is displayed. In addition, the remaining battery levels of the upper body control unit 124 mounted on the upper body garment 120 and the lower body control unit 126 mounted on the lower body garment 122 are also displayed, and the battery level is zero during training. Attention to the user not to become.
- the screen transitions to the standby screen that waits until the training start time.
- FIG. 16 shows the entire training and the screen for starting each set of training on the director terminal 12e.
- FIG. 16A is a screen for starting the entire training.
- the display of the button in the center of the screen corresponds to the information of the distribution setting in FIG. 12C, and the illustrated example corresponds to the case where both live distribution and VOD recording are “Yes”.
- the live distribution is "none” and the VOD recording is "yes”
- “recording start” is displayed
- the live distribution is “yes” and the VOD recording is "none”
- live distribution start is displayed and the live distribution is performed.
- “None” In the case of VOD recording "None”, this screen is skipped and the screen transitions to the next screen of FIG. 16 (B). Other elements of this figure will be described later.
- FIG. 16 (B) is a screen in which the director starts each set during the training after starting the entire training in FIG. 16 (A).
- "Live distribution” and “VOD recording” are displayed corresponding to the button display in Fig. 16 (A), and below that, "SET 1 training is being prepared for Set 1", which is the set to be started. ⁇ ⁇ ”Is displayed, and a“ SET 1 training start ”button is provided below it to start the set.
- the director presses this button the set starts, and the provision of the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the training program 2 and the program control unit 3 to the user starts.
- the provision of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data at the time of live distribution is started based on the operation of a director different from the instructor.
- the entire training or each set can be started at the user's favorite timing according to the terminal operation of the user instead of the director.
- a list of users participating in the training is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the details will be described later.
- FIG. 17 and 18 show an example of a training screen displayed to each of the user, the instructor, and the director during training.
- FIG. 17 is a screen example of self-weight training using only the EMS device 102 without using the bike 103
- FIG. 18 is a screen example of the bike training using the bike 103 and the EMS device 102.
- (A) is a training screen displayed on the user terminal 12
- (B) is a training screen displayed on the instructor terminal 12d
- (C) is a training screen displayed on the director terminal 12e. Is.
- FIG. 17A is an example of a user screen during self-weight training.
- a live video 831 of an instructor who demonstrates and teaches training is displayed. Further, the live voice of the instructor is reproduced from the speaker 14 of the user terminal 12.
- a response button 832 constituting an intention display unit is provided.
- the response button 832 By pressing the response button 832, the user can indicate his / her intention to the instructor or the director. For example, by showing the response (response) in response to the call from the instructor during training with the response button 832, it is possible to convey the user's engagement to training and the high degree of enthusiasm to the instructor live.
- a more complicated expression of intention may be made possible. For example, prepare an icon that shows emotions such as emotions, prepare an icon that shows the evaluation of training, make it possible to select a default standard message, make it possible to enter a message with text or pictograms, etc. Can be considered.
- the status display unit 833 shows the remaining battery level and EMS level (LV. 8) of the upper body control unit 124 (Top), and the remaining battery level and EMS level (LV. 20) of the lower body control unit 126 (Bottom).
- the EMS level adjustment target selection unit 834 selects the target for which the EMS level is to be adjusted. In the illustrated example, "All", that is, both the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are selected. By pressing the "Select” button, only the upper body control unit 124 and only the lower body control unit 126 can be selected.
- the EMS level adjustment unit 835 increases or decreases the EMS level of the selected EMS level adjustment target. In the illustrated example in which "All" is selected, when the "+" button, which is a level increase button, is pressed, the EMS level of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 is increased by one step, respectively.
- Top increases from LV.8 to LV.9 (Bottom is the upper limit of LV.20, so it does not increase any more).
- the "-" button which is a level reduction button, is pressed, the EMS levels of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are each reduced by one step.
- Top decreases from LV.8 to LV.7 and Bottom decreases from LV.20 to LV.19.
- the EMS level adjustment target is only Top and only Bottom, each EMS level can be adjusted one step at a time.
- the pause button 836 is a button for suspending the electrical stimulation of the EMS device 102. If the user feels that the electrical stimulation is too strong or something is wrong during training, the electrical stimulation can be stopped safely immediately by pressing this button. Safety is improved by arranging the pause button 836 near the "-" button which is the EMS level decrease button, that is, far from the "+” button which is the EMS level increase button. That is, even if the user who tries to press the pause button 836 makes an erroneous operation due to the influence of electrical stimulation, it is unlikely that the separated "+” button is pressed, and the adjacent "-” button is pressed at most. Stay in. At this time, since the level of electrical stimulation is lowered by pressing the "-” button, the possibility of erroneous operation is reduced, and the pause button 836 can be safely pressed.
- exit button 837 to exit training, the number of sets currently in progress (SET 1), elapsed time (04:55) and a time bar that visually shows it, and live streaming is in progress.
- a live display (LIVE) indicating the above, a status display unit 838 indicating the total time of the set (10:00), and the like are provided.
- FIG. 17B is an example of an instructor screen during self-weight training.
- a list of 839 users participating in the training is displayed together with the total number of participants (3,122).
- basic information such as an icon, a name or ID, a gender, an age, and a place is displayed.
- STUDIO is displayed to the users participating from the fitness gym 80 called STUDIO.
- STUDIO is displayed to the users participating from the fitness gym 80 called STUDIO.
- a "trial lesson” is displayed to the user during the trial lesson.
- information about the EMS device 102 worn by the user for example, EMS levels of Top and Bottom as shown in the state display unit 833 of FIG. 17A
- information about the user's situation for example, FIG.
- training performance data calculated based on various measurement data of the EMS device 102 and the user terminal 12 as described later (for example, physical activity intensity, consumption). Calories, a unique performance score as described later in FIG. 18), emotion display from the user transmitted via the above-mentioned intention display unit, evaluation, message, etc. may be additionally displayed.
- the instructor can grasp the attributes and status of the user in a timely manner from the above information, and can immediately utilize it for guidance and communication to each user.
- a condition specification unit 840 for designating user conditions to be displayed in the user list 839 is provided.
- the user list 839 becomes long and cannot be displayed on one screen. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down and sort under various conditions for the convenience of the instructor.
- various conditions for narrowing down the users are displayed, and when the instructor presses the desired conditions, only the users who meet the conditions are displayed in the user list 839.
- various conditions for rearranging the users may be displayed. For example, the order of participation, the order of age, the order of the number of trainings, the order of performance scores, etc. can be considered.
- a response display unit 841 is provided in the area between the condition specification unit 840 and the user list 839. This corresponds to the response button 832 described with reference to FIG. 17A, and when each user presses the response button 832 in response to an instructor's call or the like, the user's icon floats on the response display unit 841. It is displayed in various modes. The instructor can visually recognize the user's engagement and the degree of enthusiasm from the number of icons of each user displayed on the response display unit 841 and the speed at which the icons are displayed. When user engagement is low, the instructor should focus on communication such as inspiration and encouragement of the user rather than mechanical demonstration of the training movement to increase user engagement and maximize the training effect. Can be done.
- such a response display unit may be provided on the user screen of FIG. 17 (A). This allows the user to visually recognize the response of another user. In particular, when training is exciting, by seeing a large number of responses from other users displayed on the response display unit, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity with other users and immerse themselves in training while sharing an uplifting feeling.
- a display indicating that live distribution is in progress, a display indicating that VOD recording is in progress, a training progress status (SET 1 training in progress), etc. are displayed.
- FIG. 17 (C) is an example of the director screen during self-weight training. Similar to the status display unit 842 in FIG. 17 (B), status displays such as “live distribution”, “VOD recording”, and "SET 1 training" are displayed in the center of the screen, and FIG. 17 (B) is on the right side of the screen. ) Is displayed in the same manner as the user list 839.
- An emergency stop button 843 is provided at the lower left of the screen.
- the emergency stop button 843 may be used to stop the EMS devices 102 of all users all at once, may be selectively stopped by designating a specific user, or both may be selected.
- FIG. 18A is an example of a user screen during bike training.
- a live video 831 of an instructor who demonstrates and teaches training is displayed.
- the motorcycle information display unit 844 on the left side of the screen displays the above-mentioned various information of the motorcycle 103 acquired by the device information acquisition unit 108.
- the user list 839 on the right side of the screen differs from FIG. 17 only in the following points.
- the performance score in units of TG abbreviation of training gauge
- the order is displayed in the upper left of each user area (2456-2460), and the users are displayed in ascending order.
- the 2458th user displayed in the center is the user himself / herself who uses this user terminal 12, and his / her ranking during training can be easily confirmed. This raises the awareness of competition with other users and enables more effective training.
- the user list 839 is displayed in a ranking format centered on itself, but from the narrowing button at the bottom, various relationships such as age, gender, "friends" and "mutual follow-up” etc. It is possible to narrow down the users to be displayed according to the conditions of. In addition to narrowing down, it may be possible to sort according to desired conditions. Other display information is basically the same as in FIG.
- FIG. 18B is an example of an instructor screen during bike training.
- the user list 839 on the right side of the screen is the same as in FIG. 18A, but the display can be changed more finely by the narrowing condition and the sorting condition that can be specified by the condition specifying unit 840 provided on the left side of the screen.
- the user who has updated the personal best measured by TG is displayed as "personal best breakthrough", and the instructor can individually call out to the user.
- the narrowing-down condition of the condition designation unit 840 is almost the same as that of FIG. 17B, but a condition regarding the personal best update user is added.
- the display can be updated so that the user having a predetermined rank (1st, 100th, 500th) based on the TG comes to the top of the user list 839.
- the user list 839 can be scrolled up and down by scrolling on the screen of the instructor.
- Other display information is basically the same as in FIG.
- FIG. 18C is an example of the director screen during bike training. It is basically the same as FIG. 17 (C), but the user list on the right side of the screen is the same as that of FIG. 18 (B).
- FIG. 19 and 20 show various screen examples displayed on the display screen 13 of the user terminal 12 after the training is completed.
- FIG. 19A displays the training result.
- training result data such as ranking (ranking), calories burned, mileage, and training gauge (performance score) among all users in this training are displayed in summary.
- the training gauge the one acquired this time and the cumulative one are displayed together.
- stages are set according to the cumulative training gauge, and the training gauge required to promote to the next stage is also displayed.
- FIG. 19B is a screen displayed when the stage is promoted. When a stage is promoted, a badge corresponding to each stage will be awarded as a proof.
- Training results including detailed data not displayed on this summary screen) as shown in FIG. 19 (A) and achievement stages and badges as shown in FIG. 19 (B) are saved as logs in each user's account. It can be viewed or managed by the user himself or the instructor who provides the guidance.
- FIG. 20A is a screen displayed when the user clears a predetermined mission.
- the mission can be appropriately created by the administrator of the motion control system 100, and the mission is cleared when the user achieves a predetermined condition such as "achievement of 30 days of training" shown in the figure.
- the mission achievement conditions can be set arbitrarily, but for example, those related to the numerical value of the training result such as "mileage XXX km or more" and "calorie consumption XXX cal or more", “training participation XXX times or more", “1 month” You can set things related to the number and frequency of participation in training such as “training X times or more” and things related to other users and instructors such as “friends XX or more" and "favorite instructor XX or more". ..
- points and badges that can be used for purchasing services and products provided by the administrator of the motor control system 100 can be given to the user to enhance the user's engagement.
- FIG. 20B is a screen in which the user evaluates the instructor after the training is completed.
- predetermined evaluation items such as "hospitality”, “leading ability”, “talk”, “performance”, and “knowledge” of the instructor are evaluated on a five-point scale.
- the evaluation result here is reflected in the instructor's ranking and profile information, and serves as reference information for the user to select an instructor in the next and subsequent trainings.
- Instructors can recognize their own improvement items from these evaluation information and improve the quality of training to improve the ranking, so that users can receive high quality training from their favorite instructors.
- the one-to-many training mode in which one instructor teaches a large number of users has been mainly described, but the present invention can also be applied to the one-to-one training mode in which one instructor teaches one user.
- the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data can be synchronized by the action of the synchronization signal generation unit 401 and the data synchronization unit 501 described in the embodiment, and the user can be synchronized.
- the mode is not limited to the mode in which the instructor guides the user, and the mode in which the instructor competes with each other in the same training as the user may be used.
- the training may be performed in such a manner as to compete among the pairs.
- the user terminal 12 has been described as being used by one user, but the training may be performed while a plurality of users share one user terminal 12.
- the user terminal 12 is a device equipped with a large display such as a television
- a plurality of users gather in the personal space 81 where the user terminal 12 is installed, and it is as if they are in the fitness gym 80 in front of the instructor shown on the display. You can do realistic training like this.
- a plurality of instructors may appear in sequence or simultaneously in one training program 2 to instruct one or more users.
- FIG. 21 shows an aspect of training in the fitness gym 80 and the personal space 81 by the exercise control system according to the modified example.
- the user terminal 12a provides a training program to the user 82a
- the user terminal 12b provides the training program to the user 82b.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b are connected to the muscle electrical stimulator attached to the fitness wear 102a and 102b worn by the user via wireless communication to control the muscle electrical stimulator.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b are connected to the mirror displays 105a and 105b which also have the functions of the display screens 13a and 13b in the embodiment (FIG. 1), respectively, and control the display contents of the mirror displays 105a and 105b to serve as a model.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b are operated by the instructors 83a and 83b.
- the instructors 83a and 83b show model movements while verbally giving instructions and advice to the users 82a and 82b in the vicinity of the user terminals 12a and 12b.
- FIG. 8 and the like when one instructor gives training guidance of the same content to a large number of local and remote users at the same time, it is not necessary to assign an instructor to each user.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b link the video of the movement as a model displayed on the mirror displays 105a and 105b with the voltage application to the muscle electrical stimulator of the fitness wear 102a and 102b, so that the voluntary movement and the involuntary movement in the hybrid training are not possible. Achieve synchronization of voluntary movements.
- the image of the movement as a model to be displayed on the mirror displays 105a and 105b may be a live or archive demonstration image of the instructor taken by the camera 109, or an operation model having a human body shape created by CG or the like. It may be a video of.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b may be stand-alone or interlocked with each other via a network, or are connected to a motion control management server via a network such as the Internet, and are based on instructions received from the motion control management server.
- the training program 2 as described above may be provided to each user.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b can display individual contents on the mirror displays 105a and 105b at individual timings in order to individually provide a training program to a plurality of people.
- the user terminals 12a and 12b display the same information on the mirror displays 105a and 105b via the training program 2 and the program control unit 3, except for the posture information of each user described later. Is preferable.
- the user terminal 12c provides a training program to the user 82c who trains in the personal space 81.
- the user terminal 12c used in the personal space 81 is connected to the muscle electrical stimulator attached to the fitness wear 102c via wireless communication to control the muscle electrical stimulator.
- the user terminal 12c is an electronic device such as a tablet terminal that also serves as a display.
- FIG. 22 shows the configuration of the mirror display 105.
- the mirror display 105 includes a mirror 1051, a display control device 1052, a display device 1053, and an attitude sensor 1054.
- the display control device 1052 is a computer that displays an image of exercise on the mirror display 105 according to a training program executed by the user terminal 12.
- the attitude sensor 1054 emits infrared rays toward the user 82 standing in front of the mirror display 105, and detects the depth of the user who is the object by the infrared sensor and the image sensor that detect the infrared rays reflected from the object. Get a range image.
- the posture of the user is estimated based on the detection result, and the image of the user's skeleton model or the like based on the estimation result is displayed on the display device 1053 of the mirror display 105.
- the mirror 1051 is a mirror having a size that can reflect the image of the whole body of the user 82 on the front side, while the transmission loss when transmitting infrared rays and radio waves from the back side is suppressed to a low level.
- the display device 1053 is a display device having a screen slightly smaller than the area of the mirror 1051 and capable of displaying a large body model corresponding to the whole body of the user 82, for example, a vertical screen equivalent to a 70-inch display.
- the display device 1053 is installed on the back side of the mirror 1051, the user 82 can visually recognize the image on the screen of the display device 1053 that passes through the mirror 1051 from the front side of the mirror 1051.
- the mirror 1051 and the display device 1053 are installed so that at least the upper end of the screen is located above the line of sight of the user 82, for example, the mirror 1051 and the display device 1053 are installed so as to be located higher than the height of the average user 82.
- a general video output device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a projector, and a screen can be used.
- the attitude sensor 1054 includes an infrared projector that emits infrared rays, an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays reflected on an object, an image sensor such as a CMOS sensor that captures reflected light from an object and acquires an image, a directional microphone, and the like. Consists of including.
- the attitude sensor 1054 measures the distance (depth, depth) of the object by projecting infrared rays onto the object and detecting the reflected infrared rays, and the image sensor detects the reflected light from the object. Acquire a distance image by capturing.
- a back-illuminated ToF distance image sensor in which the posture sensor 1054 is integrated with the display control device 1052 may be adopted.
- the attitude sensor 1054 is installed horizontally, for example, at a position about 55 cm above the floor, and detects the attitude of the user 82 at an angle of view of about 70 degrees in the horizontal direction and about 60 degrees in the vertical direction.
- a range of recommended training spaces for the user 82 to fit within the detectable range of the posture sensor 1054 is drawn on the floor.
- the training space is installed as a circular shape centered around about 2.5 m from the mirror 1051, and in order to recognize only the user 82 in the training space, other than the distance range of about 2.5 m from the mirror 1051.
- the screen is blacked out from the detection target by the attitude sensor 1054, while another person is behind the user 82 (outside the training space). It is not detected even if it passes.
- a roll screen or the like is installed behind the user 82, and mirrors 1051 are installed facing each other along the wall side of the room so that the mirrors 1051 can be connected to each other. The positional relationship should be the most distant. As described above, the detection accuracy by the attitude sensor 1054 can be maintained high.
- a mechanical device such as a gyro sensor or a potentiometer may be attached to the user 82 instead of the attitude sensor 1054, or a general detection technique used for motion capture of a fluctuation of a magnetic field by a magnetic sensor may be used. You may use it.
- the attitude sensor 1054 is horizontally installed below the display device 1053 on the back side of the mirror 1051, and its height is about 55 cm from the floor.
- the posture detection range 206 of the posture sensor 1054 has an angle of view of, for example, 70 degrees in the horizontal direction and 60 degrees in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to detect the whole body of the user 82 standing at a position of about 2.5 m from the posture sensor 1054. ..
- the attitude sensor 1054 is temporarily installed on the display device 1053, it will be detected at an angle that looks down on the user 82 from above.
- the angle of incidence on the mirror 1051 becomes large, so that the mirror 1051 Orientation detection through the glass may be affected by the refraction of the glass.
- the attitude sensor 1054 when the attitude sensor 1054 is installed under the display device 1053, it can be installed horizontally, so that it can be less affected by the refraction caused by the glass of the mirror 1051. Further, by installing the attitude sensor 1054 on the back side of the mirror 1051 and below the display device 1053, it is possible not only to make the attitude sensor 1054 inconspicuous but also to make it difficult to cover dust.
- the posture estimation unit provided in the display control device 1052 limits the detection target to only the user 82 even when a person other than the user 82, for example, an instructor 83 who advises the user 82 to move, enters the detection range.
- the process of limiting and excluding the instructor 83 from the detection target is performed.
- a mark may be drawn on the floor to limit the standing position of the instructor 83 to a predetermined area.
- the floor position may be moved up and down to adjust the height.
- the floor on which the user 82 moves is made of an elastic or cushioning cushioning member, so that vibration is less likely to be transmitted to the user in the adjacent booth.
- the floor on which the mirror 1051 is installed is made of a material harder than the floor on which the user 82 moves, so that the vibration due to the movement of the user 82 is less likely to be transmitted to the mirror 1051 and the influence on the measurement of the sensor is suppressed.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram of a screen example in which the operating state of the user 82 is displayed on the mirror display 105 by an object using the posture sensor 1054.
- the motion model 212 is displayed in the lower right corner, and the motion to be performed by the user 82 is indicated by the motion of the motion model 212.
- the motion model 212 may be a live or archive demonstration video of the instructor taken by the camera 109.
- This figure is an example of a screen called "EXPANDER" corresponding to the movement of expanding and contracting both arms.
- the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b which are double circular objects for indicating the positions corresponding to both hands of the user 82 detected by the posture sensor 1054, are displayed in yellow, and the user 82 spreads both arms. Then, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b move laterally so as to follow both hands of the user 82, and change to orange. At this time, the operation state image 222, which is a double rhombus object showing the operation state, is also deformed so as to follow the movements of both arms of the user 82 and extend laterally.
- the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b return to yellow, and the diamond-shaped object having only a frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 prior to the next operation. By deforming so as to contract in the lateral direction, it is guided that the next operation is to contract.
- the operation state image 222 showing the operation state is also deformed so as to follow the movements of both arms of the user 82 and contract.
- the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b return to yellow, and the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b are both hands prior to the next operation.
- the operation state image 222 also moves following the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b.
- the rhombus object having only a frame shape is separated from the motion state image 222 and deformed so as to extend laterally, thereby guiding that the next motion is the motion of extending both arms.
- the frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 and shows a movement which spreads laterally prior to the movement of the user 82, and the timing when the user 82 should contract both arms. Then, prior to the movement of the user 82, the frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 and shows a movement of contracting in the lateral direction. Further, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b also move to the target position prior to the movement of the user 82. In this way, while guiding the user 82 to visually and intuitively grasp the direction to be performed next, by following the actual operation of the user 82 and visualizing the operation state, the user 82 moves himself / herself.
- the operation target and the operation state of the user 82 are shown by the operation model 212, the position state image 220, the operation state image 222, and the like on the same screen.
- the effect image showing the training operation described as an example of the image data 2B in FIG. 1 is displayed together with the background of the object in FIG. 23, the user 82 recognizes the operation to be performed next from the effect image. can.
- the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times of the predetermined operation is shown by the circular gauge, and the remaining number of times is also shown by the number displayed in the circular gauge.
- FIG. 24 shows an example of the first to fourth screens.
- the first screen example of this figure (a) is the screen of "SQUAT & FLY".
- the upper body has the elbows bent 90 degrees, the arms are raised, and both arms are closed and spread.
- the lower half of the body is a movement that lowers the waist according to the movement of closing the arms and raises the waist according to the movement of spreading. That is, while the electric stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 4 seconds, both arms are closed and the hips are lowered. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, pectoralis major muscle, and latissimus dorsi muscle.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the angle of the movement range when the upper body is opened in the horizontal direction of the arm (shoulder). Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- the second screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "SQUAT & LAT-PULLDOWN" (squat & lat pull-down).
- Square & lat pull-down the screen of "SQUAT & LAT-PULLDOWN" (squat & lat pull-down).
- the action of lowering the hips while lowering both arms is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, both elbows are extended while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It raises its hips while spreading its arms upward, and pauses for 2 seconds.
- the user pays particular attention to the thigh, pectoralis major muscle, and latissimus dorsi muscle.
- the upper body changes the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 according to the angle of the movement range of the upper arm in the raising and lowering motion of the arm. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- the third screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "SQUAT & ARM CURL" (squat & arm curl).
- SQUAT & ARM CURL square & arm curl
- the action of lowering the hips while raising both forearms is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz again for 4 seconds, both forearms are lowered. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the upper body change according to the angle of the movement range of the forearm raising and lowering motion. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist.
- the fourth screen example of this figure (d) is the screen of "CHEST PRESS" (chest press).
- CHEST PRESS chest press
- both forearms are pushed forward while keeping them horizontal, and after pausing for 2 seconds, both forearms are pushed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It pulls back while keeping it horizontal, and pauses for 2 seconds.
- the user pays particular attention to the thigh, latissimus dorsi muscle, and rectus abdominis muscle.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 according to the amount of movement to move the forearm back and forth while keeping it horizontal (for example, the amount of movement in the range from the position where the midpoint of the forearm is aligned with the shoulder to the position where the arm is fully extended).
- the color and shape of the operating state image 222 change. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- FIG. 25 shows an example of the fifth to eighth screens.
- the fifth screen example of this figure (a) is the screen of the “EXPANDER” (expander) also shown in FIG. 23.
- EXPANDER electric stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz
- both arms are expanded from the closed state to the left and right, and after a pause of 2 seconds, both arms are opened again while an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 4 seconds. It closes and pauses for 2 seconds.
- the next operation is to open and close both arms diagonally so that the right arm is diagonally upward and the left arm is diagonally downward, and finally the left arm is diagonally upward and the right arm is diagonally downward.
- the sixth screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "Lunge TWIST" (lunge twist).
- the operation of lowering the hips while twisting the hips while applying the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, the twist of the hips is returned while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds. After repeating this for 8 sets as one set, the operation of switching the left and right legs in 6 seconds and twisting the hips in the opposite direction is repeated for 8 sets.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the movement angle of rotating the shoulder in the horizontal direction about the vertical line at the center of the body. After that, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of a total of 30 seconds during which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- the seventh screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "Lunge SIDE VENT" (lunge side vent).
- the upper body is tilted to one side and the hips are lowered. It raises its hips while returning, and pauses for 2 seconds.
- the left and right legs are switched within 6 seconds, and the operation of lowering the waist while tilting the upper body in the opposite direction is repeated for 8 sets.
- the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the rectus abdominis muscle, and the oblique abdominal muscle.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the tilt angle of the movement of tilting the line connecting both shoulders laterally with respect to the horizontal plane. After that, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of a total of 30 seconds during which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- the eighth screen example of this figure (d) is the screen of "KICKBACK" (kickback).
- the operation is performed so that both forearms are raised from the bottom to the front around the elbow, and after a pause for 2 seconds, the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds.
- both forearms are lowered, and a pause of 2 seconds is entered.
- the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the biceps brachii muscle, and the triceps brachii muscle.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the rotation angle of the forearm around the elbow in the front-back direction. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
- FIG. 26 shows an example of the ninth to eleventh screens.
- the ninth screen example of this figure (a) is a “Punch” screen.
- the posture is fixed while the electric stimulus having a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the operation of punching in a specified direction is performed while the electric stimulus having a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered.
- the position and color of the position state image 220 change depending on whether or not the user could reach the designated position among the predetermined plurality of aerial positions.
- an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
- the tenth screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "KNEE & ELBOW".
- the posture is fixed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the movement of bringing the elbow and the knee close to each other is repeated while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered.
- the color of the position state image 220 changes depending on whether the distance between the elbow and the knee is within a predetermined value.
- an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
- the eleventh screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "HIGH KNEE".
- the posture is fixed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the thigh-raising dash is performed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered.
- the color of the position state image 220 changes depending on whether or not the position of the knee rises to a predetermined height.
- an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
- the number of times, time, position, distance, angle, range, etc. are indicated by the change in the shape, color, and arrangement of the state object 218 such as the position state image 220 and the operation state image 222, and the operation status and operation can be changed. You can visually indicate to the user whether it is appropriate. By visually recognizing the change in the figure, the user can intuitively grasp the load of exercise not only from the body but also from the visual sense.
- the state object 218 generated by the attitude sensor 1054 built in the mirror display 105 is displayed on the display device 1053 of the mirror display 105, but the same applies to the personal space 81 without the mirror display 105.
- Training is possible. That is, the posture of the user can be detected by using various sensors built in the user terminal 12c and other electronic devices, and the state object 218 generated based on the sensor can be displayed on the user terminal 12c as shown in the example of FIG. It can be displayed on the screen 13c or a large display such as a television in the personal space 81.
- the user in the personal space 81 confirms the direction of the next movement associated with his / her posture with the state object 218 while referring to the movement model 212 and the movement as a model by the instructor's demonstration video. You can train effectively.
- the sensor that detects the posture of the user has been described in detail, but by using various other sensors, information on the user during training can be collected, real-time instruction by the instructor, and after training. It can be used to provide advice to users and improve training programs. For example, if a biosensor that measures biometric data such as heart rate, body temperature, blood pressure, and blood glucose level is utilized, the physical condition of the user during training can be grasped precisely, and guidance or the like can be provided accordingly. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the biometric data of a specific user, the EMS device 102 of the user can be stopped in an emergency automatically or manually by the director who received the alert notification.
- biometric data such as heart rate, body temperature, blood pressure, and blood glucose level
- each biosensor can be provided at a body portion suitable for measuring each biometric data, and various types of living organisms can be provided. Data can be acquired with high accuracy.
- sensors such as an acceleration sensor and an angular acceleration sensor for detecting the movement of the user in each part of the EMS device 102 of the upper body and the lower body, the movement of each part of the user can be grasped precisely.
- the EMS device 102 can be stopped urgently as in the case of the above-mentioned biometric data abnormality.
- an image sensor such as a tablet or smartphone as a sensor outside the EMS device 102
- real-time posture detection and fall detection as described in the above example, and motion analysis based on images are performed. It can be used to generate advice information via an algorithm.
- measurement data such as temperature, humidity, and amount of sunshine when the user performs training may be utilized.
- a sensor 111 that collects various information of the instructor during training may be provided.
- the sensor 111 detects the movement or gesture of the instructor and wears the mechanical stimulators 104a, 104b, 104c (hereinafter referred to as the mechanical stimulator 104) worn by a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81.
- the main purpose is to apply mechanical stimuli such as force, vibration, and movement through (collectively referred to as).
- the method, type, installation location, and installation mode of the sensor 111 are arbitrary.
- the sensor 111 can be configured by a device capable of detecting a force such as a piezoelectric sensor or a push button attached to a chest portion of fitness wear worn by the instructor.
- the action of the instructor hitting his / her chest, the action of the instructor hitting the user's shoulder (through the screen), and the gestures of other instructors are acquired by using the image sensor that can also be used as the camera 109 as the sensor 111. It can be detected by applying a known image recognition technique to the image.
- the movement or gesture of the instructor may be detected by using the acceleration sensor or the inertial sensor mounted on the instructor's arm, face, or the like as the sensor 111.
- the posture sensor 1054 for detecting the posture of the user shown with respect to FIG. 22 may be used as the sensor 111 for detecting the posture of the instructor, and a gesture or the like may be detected from the posture of the instructor.
- an operation on the instructor terminal 12d and / or the director terminal 12e indicates a mechanical stimulus to be applied to all or a part of the user's mechanical stimulator 104 as a whole or a designated part. You may.
- the training control unit 3011 is a mechanical stimulator 104 of all or part of a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81 based on various measurement data input from the sensor 111. Generate control data so that mechanical stimuli are applied to the whole or designated parts.
- the training control unit 3011 may use the training control unit 3011 as a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81 based on various measurement data input from the sensor 111. Control data may be generated so that electrical stimulation is applied to all or a designated part of the EMS device 102 in whole or in part. Further, various information of the instructor measured by the sensor 111 may be input to the video control unit 3B and / or the voice control unit 3C of the moving image server 302. For example, when the sensor 111 detects the action of the instructor hitting the chest as described above, the image control unit 3B illuminates the instructor's chest on the display screen 13 of the user terminal 12, and sweats from the chest. The voice control unit 3C can perform a video effect such as scattering, and the voice control unit 3C can perform a sound effect such as producing a chest tapping sound or other sound effects from the speaker 14 of the user terminal 12.
- the method, type, installation site, and installation mode of the mechanical stimulator 104 worn by the user are arbitrary.
- a piezoelectric element, a vibration device which is attached to the chest portion of the EMS device 102 as fitness wear worn by the user in order to give the user a similar feel when the instructor hits the chest as described above.
- the mechanical stimulus device 104 can be configured by any device that can apply mechanical stimuli such as physical force, vibration, and movement, such as a tactile device (haptics device).
- the user is notified in real time in synchronization with various information such as the movement and gesture of the instructor detected by the sensor 111 (or based on the operation on the instructor terminal 12d and / or the director terminal 12e).
- mechanical stimulus can be given (or electrical stimulus can be given, visual effect can be performed, audio effect can be performed), so it creates a sense of unity with the instructor, an uplifting feeling during training, and an immersive feeling for training. It can achieve a high training effect.
- FIG. 28 schematically shows the configuration of a motion control system in which the electrical stimulation training information communication device according to the modified example is realized.
- the description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will be omitted.
- the program control unit 3 includes an EMS control unit 3A, a video control unit 3B, and a voice control unit that make various adjustments to the training program 2 being executed by the user terminal 12, the device information acquisition unit 108, and the director terminal 12e. It is equipped with 3C.
- the EMS control unit 3A outputs the EMS instruction data 2A stored in the training program 2 as it is, but when the director terminal 12e performs an operation such as an emergency stop, all or a part of the designated users The provision of the EMS instruction data 2A to the user is stopped, and the application of the electrical stimulus to the user is safely stopped.
- the communication unit 4 includes a synchronization signal generation unit 401, a transmission unit 402, and a reception unit 403 in order to communicate with a remote user via the network 19.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal for synchronization of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data that has passed through the program control unit 3.
- the transmission unit 402 adds the synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation unit 401, and transmits EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data.
- the receiving unit 403 receives various data from the remote user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c via the network 19.
- FIG. 29 shows an example of a synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation unit 401 and a transmission signal generated by the transmission unit 402.
- the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data input from the program control unit 3 to the communication unit 4 are each divided into packets having a fixed time length.
- the EMS instruction data is divided into three time-consecutive packets E # 1, E # 2, and E # 3
- the video data is three time-consecutive packets V # 1, V # 2.
- V # 3 and the audio data is divided into three temporally continuous packets A # 1, A # 2, and A # 3.
- the subscripts "# 1", “# 2", and “# 3” mean the timing at which each data should be provided to a remote user. That is, three packets E # 1, V # 1, A # 1 with the subscript "# 1", and three packets E # 2, V # 2, A # 2, with the subscript "# 2". The three packets E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 with the subscript "# 3" should be provided to the remote user at the same timing.
- these timings are represented by T1, T2, and T3, respectively.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 401 sets the provision timing at the beginning of each packet of each data. This is an example of inserting a representative synchronization signal.
- the same synchronization signal S1 representing the timing is inserted at the beginning of each packet E # 1, V # 1, A # 1 whose provision timing is T1, and each packet E # 2, V # 2 whose provision timing is T2 is inserted.
- the same synchronization signal S2 indicating the timing is inserted at the beginning of A # 2, and the same timing indicating the timing is inserted at the beginning of each packet E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 whose provision timing is T3.
- Synchronous signal S3 is inserted.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of one packet.
- the synchronization signals S1 to S3 may be any signal as long as the timings of the three data can be adjusted on the receiving side, and the three data do not necessarily have to be the same signal.
- the detailed provision timing such as the elapsed time from the program start time is written in the synchronization signal S1 of the EMS instruction data
- only the information associated with the synchronization signal S1 is written in the synchronization signal S1'of the video data and the audio data.
- the synchronization signal S1 and S1' can be synchronized on the receiving side, and the detailed provision timing can be obtained from the synchronization signal S1.
- FIG. 29 (B) is an example in which an arbitrary integer larger than 1 is set as N and a synchronization signal is inserted for each N packet instead of inserting the synchronization signal for each packet as shown in FIG. 29 (A).
- the synchronization signal S1 is inserted before the packet of the provision timing T1
- the synchronization signal is not inserted for a while, and the packet of "# N" (providing timing TN) is continuously transmitted to "# N + 1" (providing timing).
- the synchronization signal S2 is inserted before the packet of TN + 1). Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of N packets.
- each data can be synchronized for each N packet. Although it depends on the environment of the network 19, it is rare that a significant transmission delay difference occurs between data in one packet, and it is often sufficient to synchronize each of a plurality of packets as in this example.
- the synchronization signal generation unit 401 uses three packets at the same timing in the three data. This is an example of inserting a synchronization signal at the beginning of a basic packet group consisting of. That is, the synchronization signal S1 is inserted at the beginning of the basic packet group consisting of three packets E # 1, V # 1, and A # 1 whose provision timing is T1, and the synchronization signal S2 is the three packets whose provision timing is T2.
- the synchronization signal S3 is a basic packet consisting of three packets E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 whose provision timing is T3. Inserted at the beginning of the group. Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of 3 packets (1 basic packet group).
- FIG. 29 (D) is an example in which a synchronization signal is inserted for each N basic packet group instead of inserting a synchronization signal for each basic packet group as shown in FIG. 29 (C).
- the synchronization signal S1 is inserted before the basic packet group of the provision timing T1
- the synchronization signal is not inserted for a while and continuously transmitted to the basic packet group of "#N" (provided timing TN), and "# N + 1".
- provision timing TN + 1 the synchronization signal S2 is inserted before the basic packet group. Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of 3N packets (N basic packet group).
- each data can be synchronized for each N packet.
- a synchronization signal for synchronizing different types of data is embedded in the transmission signal, and each data is specified on the receiving side based on the synchronization signal. It should be possible to arrange them in chronological order.
- the communication unit 5 communicates with the communication unit 4 of the fitness gym 80 via the network 19 in the personal space 81 where the remote user is located.
- the communication unit 5 includes a data synchronization unit 501, a reception unit 502, and a transmission unit 503.
- These functions of the communication unit 5 can be realized by a user terminal 12c composed of a general-purpose communication device such as a tablet or a smartphone.
- the receiving unit 502 receives the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data to which the synchronization signal is added, which are transmitted from the transmitting unit 402.
- the data synchronization unit 501 synchronizes the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the received synchronization signal.
- the transmission unit 503 transmits various data from the user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c to the reception unit 403.
- the data synchronization unit 501 performs the reverse processing of the processing shown in FIG. 29 based on the received synchronization signal. That is, regardless of which mode of the signals of FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (D) is received, the synchronization signal S1 and the like are first specified, and each packet of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data should be appropriate based on the synchronization signal S1 and the like.
- the process of arranging at the provision timings T1, T2, and T3 is performed. As a result, packets E # 1, V # 1, and A # 1 are synchronized with the provision timing T1, packets E # 2, V # 2, and A # 2 are synchronized with the provision timing T2, and packets E # 3 and V # are synchronized. 3.
- a # 3 is synchronized with the provision timing T3. In this way, it becomes possible to provide synchronized electrical stimulation (EMS device 102c), video (display screen 13c), and voice (speaker 14c) to a user in a remote personal space 81.
- EMS device 102c synchronized electrical stimulation
- video display screen 13c
- voice speaker 14c
- the training can be performed in synchronization with other users by the action of the data synchronization unit 501. That is, when the synchronization signals generated at a predetermined frequency during the execution of the training program 2 are S1, S2, S3 ... In order, the user who participates from the middle at the timing when the nth synchronization signal Sn is transmitted Execution of the training program 2 may be started from the nth packet E # n, V # n, A # n synchronized based on the synchronization signal Sn.
- a delay of up to several seconds may occur due to the specification of the synchronization signal Sn and the specific processing of the nth packet, but this does not pose a big problem. Even if it is delayed for the instructor or another user, the packet received by that user is synchronized so that the user is unaware of the delay.
- FIG. 17 the effect of delay appears in the above-mentioned "call & response" exchange with the instructor, but this shows the degree of excitement of training based on the response of many users, and the delay is about several seconds. Even if there is, it does not become a big problem.
- each device described in the embodiment can be realized by the hardware resource or the software resource, or by the cooperation of the hardware resource and the software resource.
- Processors, ROMs, RAMs, and other LSIs can be used as hardware resources.
- Programs such as operating systems and applications can be used as software resources.
- the present invention relates to the communication of information regarding training accompanied by the application of electrical stimulation.
- 2 Training program 2A EMS instruction data, 2B video data, 2C voice data, 3 program control unit, 3A EMS control unit, 3B video control unit, 3C voice control unit, 4 communication unit, 5 communication unit, 12a user terminal, 12b User terminal, 12c user terminal, 12d instructor terminal, 12e director terminal, 80 fitness gym, 81 personal space, 100 exercise control system, 102 EMS device, 103 bike, 104 machine stimulation device, 105 mirror display, 108 device information acquisition unit, 111 sensor, 301 training control server, 302 video server, 401 synchronization signal generation unit, 402 transmission unit, 501 data synchronization unit, 502 reception unit, 832 response button, 841 response display unit, 843 emergency stop button, 1035 light emitting unit, 1054 Attitude sensor, 3011 training control unit, 3012 synchronization signal generation unit, 3013 training information transmission unit, 3021 synchronization signal generation unit, 3022 video transmission unit.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Bioethics (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Primary Health Care (AREA)
- Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
- Development Economics (AREA)
- Economics (AREA)
- General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Computing Systems (AREA)
- Electrically Operated Instructional Devices (AREA)
- Near-Field Transmission Systems (AREA)
Abstract
This electrical stimulation training information transmission device comprises: a video data provision unit that provides video data 2B, 3B in which a user is seen during training; an electrical stimulation instruction data provision unit that provides instruction data about electrical stimulation to be applied by an electrical stimulation device 102 worn by the user during training; a synchronization signal generation unit 3012, 3021 that generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data 2B, 3B and the instruction data; and a moving image transmission unit 3022 that transmits the video data 2B, 3B and the synchronization signal.
Description
本発明は、電気刺激の付与を伴うトレーニングに関する情報の通信に関する。
The present invention relates to the communication of information regarding training accompanied by the application of electrical stimulation.
身体のトレーニングを行う機器として、微弱な電流で筋肉を緊張および弛緩させる電気刺激装置が知られている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。
As a device for training the body, an electrical stimulator that tensions and relaxes muscles with a weak electric current is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
ユーザが家庭などの個人的な場所で電気刺激装置を用いてトレーニングする際、電気刺激装置の使用方法や、効果的なトレーニング方法が分からない場合もあり、十分なトレーニング効果が得られない、トレーニングを継続するモチベーションを維持できない、等の問題が生じることがあった。また、フィットネスジムなどの店舗に通ってインストラクターの指導を受けることも考えられるが、そのような店舗が近隣にないユーザにとっては現実的ではない場合もある。
When a user trains with an electric stimulator in a personal place such as a home, he / she may not know how to use the electric stimulator or an effective training method, and a sufficient training effect cannot be obtained. There was a problem that the motivation to continue the training could not be maintained. It is also possible to go to a store such as a fitness gym to receive guidance from an instructor, but this may not be practical for users who do not have such a store nearby.
本発明はこうした状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、遠隔のユーザであっても効果的にトレーニングできる電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置等を提供することにある。
The present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide an electrical stimulation training information transmission device or the like that can effectively train even a remote user.
上記課題を解決するために、本発明のある態様の電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置は、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供部と、トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部と、映像データと指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成部と、映像データおよび同期信号を送信する送信部とを備える。
In order to solve the above problems, the electrical stimulation training information transmission device according to an aspect of the present invention includes a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training and an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training. An electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by the device, a synchronization signal generation unit that generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing video data and instruction data, and a transmission unit that transmits video data and synchronization signals. And prepare.
この態様によると、ユーザは受信した映像を見ながら電気刺激の付与を伴うトレーニングを効果的に行える。映像は任意のものでよいが、例えばトレーニングを実演するインストラクターの映像を流せば、ユーザはそれに倣って効果的にトレーニングできる。このとき、併せて受信した同期信号によって同期された映像と電気刺激の組合せにより、トレーニングへの没入感が高まり、優れたトレーニング効果が得られる。
According to this aspect, the user can effectively perform training with electrical stimulation while watching the received video. The video may be arbitrary, but for example, if a video of an instructor demonstrating training is shown, the user can effectively train according to it. At this time, the combination of the image synchronized with the synchronized signal received together and the electrical stimulus enhances the immersive feeling in the training, and an excellent training effect can be obtained.
本発明の別の態様は、電気刺激トレーニング情報受信装置である。この装置は、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データと、当該映像データとトレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データの同期のための同期信号とを受信する受信部と、同期信号に基づき、映像データと指示データを同期させるデータ同期部とを備える。
Another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information receiving device. This device is a receiver that receives video data viewed by the user during training and a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data of the electrical stimulation given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training. And a data synchronization unit that synchronizes video data and instruction data based on the synchronization signal.
本発明のさらに別の態様は、電気刺激トレーニング情報通信装置である。この装置は、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供部と、トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部と、映像データと指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成部と、映像データおよび同期信号を送信する送信部と、映像データおよび同期信号を受信する受信部と、同期信号に基づき、映像データと指示データを同期させるデータ同期部とを備える。
Yet another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information communication device. This device includes a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data of electrical stimulation given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training. , A synchronization signal generator that generates a synchronization signal for synchronization of video data and instruction data, a transmission unit that transmits video data and synchronization signal, a reception unit that receives video data and synchronization signal, and a synchronization signal. , A data synchronization unit for synchronizing video data and instruction data is provided.
本発明のさらに別の態様は、電気刺激トレーニング情報通信方法である。この方法は、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供ステップと、トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供ステップと、映像データと指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成ステップと、映像データおよび同期信号を送信する送信ステップと、映像データおよび同期信号を受信する受信ステップと、同期信号に基づき、映像データと指示データを同期させるデータ同期ステップとを備える。
Yet another aspect of the present invention is an electrical stimulation training information communication method. This method includes a video data providing step that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing step that provides instruction data of electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training. Based on the sync signal generation step, the sync signal generation step to generate the sync signal for syncing the video data and the instruction data, the transmit step to transmit the video data and the sync signal, the receive step to receive the video data and the sync signal, and the sync signal. , A data synchronization step for synchronizing video data and instruction data is provided.
なお、以上の構成要素の任意の組合せ、本発明の表現を方法、装置、システム、記録媒体、コンピュータプログラムなどの間で変換したものもまた、本発明の態様として有効である。
It should be noted that any combination of the above components and the conversion of the expression of the present invention between methods, devices, systems, recording media, computer programs, etc. are also effective as aspects of the present invention.
本発明によれば、遠隔のユーザであっても効果的に電気刺激の付与を伴うトレーニングを行うことができる。
According to the present invention, even a remote user can effectively perform training with electrical stimulation.
以下、本発明の実施形態の一例を説明する。同一または同等の構成要素には同一の符号を付し、重複した説明を省略する。各図面では、説明の便宜のため、構成要素の一部を適宜省略し、その寸法を適宜拡大、縮小する。各図面における上下左右等の方向は、その図面における符号の向きを基準に記述する。また、二つの構成要素の間の関係を表す「当てる」、「接触」、「固定」、「取り付け」等の用語は、特に明示がない限り、言及している条件を二者が直接的に満たす場合の他に、他の構成要素を介して満たす場合も包含する。
Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or equivalent components are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description is omitted. In each drawing, for convenience of explanation, some of the components are appropriately omitted, and the dimensions thereof are appropriately enlarged or reduced. The directions such as up, down, left, and right in each drawing are described with reference to the direction of the reference numeral in the drawing. In addition, terms such as "hit", "contact", "fixing", and "mounting", which describe the relationship between two components, directly refer to the conditions mentioned by the two parties unless otherwise specified. In addition to the case of satisfying, the case of satisfying through other components is also included.
図1は、実施形態に係る電気刺激トレーニング情報通信装置が実現される運動制御システムの構成を模式的に示す。運動制御システム100は、ディレクター端末12eを使用するディレクターの監督の下で所定のトレーニングプログラム2を実行し、インストラクター端末12dを使用するインストラクターの実演指導を受けながら、ユーザ端末12a、12b、12cをそれぞれ使用する現地または遠隔のユーザが筋肉への電気刺激の付与を伴うトレーニングを行うものである。本図では簡易的に、インストラクターが実演指導を行う店舗としてのフィットネスジム80でトレーニングを行う二人のユーザと、家庭などの個人スペース81で遠隔からトレーニングを行う一人のユーザを示すが、これより多い数のユーザが同時にトレーニングできる。フィットネスジム80では、そのスペースに応じた最大トレーニング可能人数までユーザを増やすことができ、個人スペース81では、後述する情報通信ネットワークや情報処理サーバの処理能力を超えない範囲においてユーザを増やすことができる。例えば、数百人から数千人(場合によってはそれ以上)のユーザが同時にトレーニングに参加できる。このように多数のユーザが、映像、音声、電気刺激の組合せによる上質なトレーニングプログラム2を一斉かつ同時に行うことで、インストラクターや他ユーザとの一体感、トレーニング中の高揚感、トレーニングに対する没入感を演出でき、高いトレーニング効果を実現できる。
FIG. 1 schematically shows the configuration of a motion control system in which the electrical stimulation training information communication device according to the embodiment is realized. The motion control system 100 executes a predetermined training program 2 under the supervision of a director who uses the director terminal 12e, and receives demonstration guidance of an instructor who uses the instructor terminal 12d while using the user terminals 12a, 12b, and 12c, respectively. The local or remote user who uses it provides training with electrical stimulation to the muscles. This figure simply shows two users who train at the fitness gym 80 as a store where the instructor gives demonstration guidance, and one user who trains remotely at a personal space 81 such as a home. A large number of users can train at the same time. In the fitness gym 80, the number of users can be increased to the maximum number of people who can be trained according to the space, and in the personal space 81, the number of users can be increased within the range not exceeding the processing capacity of the information communication network and the information processing server described later. .. For example, hundreds to thousands (and in some cases more) of users can participate in training at the same time. In this way, a large number of users can simultaneously and simultaneously perform a high-quality training program 2 that combines video, audio, and electrical stimulation to create a sense of unity with the instructor and other users, a sense of exhilaration during training, and a sense of immersion in training. It can be produced and a high training effect can be realized.
続いて、図1の運動制御システム100の各構成要素を順次説明する。ユーザ端末12a、12b、12c(以下、ユーザ端末12と総称する。また、ユーザ端末12や他の構成要素について、ユーザの別を表すa、b、cの添え字を適宜省略する。)は、表示画面13と、スピーカ14と、操作部15を備える。
Subsequently, each component of the motion control system 100 of FIG. 1 will be sequentially described. The user terminals 12a, 12b, and 12c (hereinafter, collectively referred to as the user terminal 12; the subscripts of a, b, and c indicating the user's distinction are appropriately omitted for the user terminal 12 and other components). It includes a display screen 13, a speaker 14, and an operation unit 15.
表示画面13は、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像を表示する。映像の詳細については後述するが、例えば、トレーニングプログラム2中に予め用意された映像や、フィットネスジム80のライブ映像(実演するインストラクターの映像、トレーニング中のユーザの映像など)、ディレクターが必要に応じて挿入する映像を適宜組み合わることができる。また、フィットネスジム80にいる現地のユーザと、個人スペース81にいる遠隔のユーザで、表示させる映像を変えてもよい。例えば、フィットネスジム80で目の前のインストラクターから実演指導を受けるユーザの表示画面13には、インストラクターの映像(図17(A)や図18(A)におけるインストラクターのライブ映像831)を表示する必要はなく、むしろ簡素な表示とすることで表示画面13ではなく眼前のインストラクターに注意を向けるよう促すことができる。一方、個人スペース81の遠隔ユーザにとっては、フィットネスジム80のライブ映像は、あたかもフィットネスジム80にいるかのような臨場感を持ってトレーニングする上で極めて有効である。なお、フィットネスジム80において、ユーザ毎に個別の表示画面13を設ける代わりに、トレーニングスペースに共通スクリーンを設けてもよい。
The display screen 13 displays an image that the user sees during training. The details of the video will be described later, but for example, the video prepared in advance during the training program 2, the live video of the fitness gym 80 (video of the instructor demonstrating, the video of the user during training, etc.), and the director as needed. The images to be inserted can be combined as appropriate. Further, the displayed image may be changed between the local user in the fitness gym 80 and the remote user in the personal space 81. For example, it is necessary to display an image of the instructor (live image 831 of the instructor in FIGS. 17 (A) and 18 (A)) on the display screen 13 of a user who receives demonstration guidance from the instructor in front of the fitness gym 80. Rather, by making the display simple, it is possible to call attention to the instructor in front of the display screen 13 instead of the display screen 13. On the other hand, for the remote user of the personal space 81, the live image of the fitness gym 80 is extremely effective for training with a sense of reality as if he / she is in the fitness gym 80. In the fitness gym 80, instead of providing an individual display screen 13 for each user, a common screen may be provided in the training space.
スピーカ14は、トレーニング中にユーザが音声を再生する。音声の詳細については後述するが、例えば、トレーニングプログラム2中に予め用意されたBGM等の音楽や、フィットネスジム80からのライブ音声(実演するインストラクターの指示音声、トレーニング中のユーザの音声など)、ディレクターが必要に応じて挿入する音声を適宜組み合わることができる。また、フィットネスジム80にいる現地のユーザと、個人スペース81にいる遠隔のユーザで、再生させる音声を変えてもよい。例えば、フィットネスジム80のライブ音声を直接聞けるユーザにはライブ音声をスピーカ14から再生する必要はないので、場合によってはユーザ端末12にスピーカ14を設けなくてもよい。一方、個人スペース81の遠隔ユーザにとっては、フィットネスジム80のライブ音声は、あたかもフィットネスジム80にいるかのような臨場感を持ってトレーニングする上で極めて有効である。なお、フィットネスジム80において、ユーザ毎に個別のスピーカ14を設ける代わりに、トレーニングスペースに共通スピーカを設けてもよい。
The speaker 14 plays a voice by the user during training. The details of the voice will be described later, but for example, music such as BGM prepared in advance during the training program 2, live voice from the fitness gym 80 (instructor's instruction voice to demonstrate, voice of the user during training, etc.), The audio that the director inserts as needed can be combined as appropriate. Further, the sound to be reproduced may be changed between the local user in the fitness gym 80 and the remote user in the personal space 81. For example, a user who can directly hear the live sound of the fitness gym 80 does not need to reproduce the live sound from the speaker 14, so that the speaker 14 may not be provided in the user terminal 12 in some cases. On the other hand, for the remote user of the personal space 81, the live voice of the fitness gym 80 is extremely effective for training with a sense of reality as if he / she is in the fitness gym 80. In the fitness gym 80, instead of providing individual speakers 14 for each user, a common speaker may be provided in the training space.
操作部15は、ユーザが様々な操作を行うための構成要素であり、タッチパネルで構成される表示画面13上のGUIで実現される。なお、GUIに限らず、ユーザ端末12に設けられる物理ボタン等で構成してもよい。後述するように、本実施形態の操作部15は、トレーニング中のユーザの操作に基づきインストラクターやディレクターに対する意思表示をする意思表示部を構成する。
The operation unit 15 is a component for the user to perform various operations, and is realized by a GUI on the display screen 13 composed of a touch panel. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the GUI, and may be configured by a physical button or the like provided on the user terminal 12. As will be described later, the operation unit 15 of the present embodiment constitutes an intention display unit that displays an intention to the instructor or the director based on the operation of the user during training.
以上のような構成のユーザ端末12は、タブレットやスマートフォン等の汎用の電子機器で構成できる。フィットネスジム80では、後述するように、トレーニング中の個々のユーザに割り当てられるトレーニング専用端末をトレーニングスペースに予め設置してもよく、ユーザ端末12の各機能はそのトレーニング専用端末で実現できる。また、ユーザ端末12の各機能は、トレーニング中に現地または遠隔のユーザが使用するトレーニング機器(例えば次に述べるバイク103)と一体的に構成してもよい。
The user terminal 12 having the above configuration can be configured by a general-purpose electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone. In the fitness gym 80, as will be described later, a training-dedicated terminal assigned to each user during training may be installed in advance in the training space, and each function of the user terminal 12 can be realized by the training-dedicated terminal. Further, each function of the user terminal 12 may be integrally configured with a training device (for example, a motorcycle 103 described below) used by a local or remote user during training.
EMS装置102とバイク103は、ユーザがトレーニング中に使用するトレーニング機器である。EMS装置102は、トレーニング中にユーザが身に付け、微弱な電流で筋肉を緊張および弛緩させて筋力強化を図る電気刺激装置である(EMSはElectrical Muscle Stimulationの略で筋電気刺激を意味する)。その具体例については後述するが、EMS装置102は、筋力強化を図りたい身体の部位(例えば、腹筋、脇腹、腕、脚、臀部、手のひら)に接触する電極を備え、そこから微弱な電流を流す。複数の部位に同時に電気刺激を付与しうるように複数の電極を配置したフィットネスウェアとしてEMS装置102を構成してもよいし、部位毎に独立したEMS装置102を個別に身に付けるようにしてもよい。
The EMS device 102 and the bike 103 are training devices used by the user during training. The EMS device 102 is an electrical stimulator worn by the user during training to tension and relax muscles with a weak current to strengthen muscle strength (EMS is an abbreviation for Electrical Muscle Stimulation, which means muscular electrical stimulation). .. A specific example thereof will be described later, but the EMS device 102 is provided with electrodes that come into contact with body parts (for example, abdominal muscles, flanks, arms, legs, buttocks, palms) for which muscle strength is desired to be strengthened, and a weak electric current is applied from the electrodes. Shed. The EMS device 102 may be configured as fitness wear in which a plurality of electrodes are arranged so that electrical stimulation can be applied to a plurality of parts at the same time, or an independent EMS device 102 may be individually worn for each part. May be good.
バイク103は、自転車を模した形状と構成を有し、ペダルに加える脚力によって、負荷のかかった車輪を駆動するトレーニング機器である。バイク103は、トレーニング機器の中でも、ユーザが意識的に身体を動かす(この場合はペダルを漕ぐ)随意運動を支援するものである。これに対し、EMS装置102は、微弱な電流によって強制的に筋肉を動かす不随意運動を支援するものである。バイク103によるトレーニングの際にEMS装置102を着用し、そこから電気刺激を受けながらペダルを漕ぐ運動をすることで、ユーザは随意運動と不随意運動を組み合わせたハイブリッドトレーニングを行うことができる。詳細は後述するように、随意運動は一般に遅筋を鍛えるのに適している一方、随意運動で鍛えることが困難な速筋はEMS装置102による不随意運動で効果的に鍛えることができる。したがって、上記のようなハイブリッドトレーニングにより、遅筋と速筋をバランス良く鍛え、トレーニング効果を飛躍的に高められる。なお、バイク103の具体例については後述する。
The bike 103 is a training device that has a shape and structure that imitates a bicycle and drives a loaded wheel by the leg force applied to the pedal. Among the training devices, the bike 103 supports voluntary movements in which the user consciously moves the body (in this case, pedals). On the other hand, the EMS device 102 supports involuntary movements that forcibly move muscles by a weak electric current. By wearing the EMS device 102 during training with the bike 103 and pedaling while receiving electrical stimulation from the EMS device 102, the user can perform hybrid training that combines voluntary movements and involuntary movements. As will be described in detail later, voluntary movements are generally suitable for training slow muscles, while fast muscles that are difficult to train with voluntary movements can be effectively trained with involuntary movements by the EMS device 102. Therefore, by the hybrid training as described above, the slow muscle and the fast muscle can be trained in a well-balanced manner, and the training effect can be dramatically enhanced. A specific example of the motorcycle 103 will be described later.
機器情報取得部108は、EMS装置102およびバイク103から各種の情報を取得する。EMS装置102からは、例えば、電気刺激を付与している部位、電気刺激の強さ、電気刺激の周波数等の情報を取得できる。バイク103からは、例えば、回転数、スピード、走行距離、アウトプット(パワー、仕事率とも呼ばれる)、消費カロリー、車輪の負荷等の情報を取得できる。これらの機器情報は、インストラクター端末12dやディレクター端末12eに随時共有されるとともに、後述するプログラム制御部3に送られて、必要な情報が、表示画面13で表示される映像データや、スピーカ14で再生される音声データに埋め込まれる。
The device information acquisition unit 108 acquires various information from the EMS device 102 and the motorcycle 103. From the EMS device 102, for example, information such as a site to which electrical stimulation is applied, the strength of electrical stimulation, the frequency of electrical stimulation, and the like can be acquired. From the motorcycle 103, for example, information such as rotation speed, speed, mileage, output (also called power and power), calorie consumption, and wheel load can be acquired. These device information are shared with the instructor terminal 12d and the director terminal 12e at any time, and are sent to the program control unit 3 described later, and necessary information is transmitted to the video data displayed on the display screen 13 and the speaker 14. It is embedded in the audio data to be played.
インストラクター端末12dは、現地または遠隔のユーザに対してトレーニングの実演指導を行うインストラクターが使用する端末である。基本的にはユーザ端末12a、12b、12cと同様に構成すればよいが、インストラクターが実演指導に集中できるように、操作部15に対応する機能は省略または簡略化するのが好ましい。後述するように、トレーニング中にユーザに対する何らかの操作が必要な場合は、インストラクターではなく主にディレクターがディレクター端末12eから操作を行う。以上のようなインストラクター端末12dは、タブレットやスマートフォン等の汎用の電子機器で構成してもよいし、フィットネスジム80でインストラクターに割り当てられるトレーニング専用端末で構成してもよい。また、インストラクターがバイク103等のトレーニング機器を自ら使用して実演指導する場合は、インストラクター端末12dの機能をそのトレーニング機器と一体的に構成してもよい。
The instructor terminal 12d is a terminal used by an instructor who provides training demonstration guidance to a local or remote user. Basically, it may be configured in the same manner as the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c, but it is preferable to omit or simplify the function corresponding to the operation unit 15 so that the instructor can concentrate on the demonstration instruction. As will be described later, when some operation is required for the user during training, the director mainly performs the operation from the director terminal 12e instead of the instructor. The instructor terminal 12d as described above may be configured by a general-purpose electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone, or may be configured by a training-dedicated terminal assigned to an instructor at the fitness gym 80. Further, when the instructor himself / herself uses a training device such as a motorcycle 103 for demonstration guidance, the function of the instructor terminal 12d may be integrally configured with the training device.
カメラ109は、フィットネスジム80のライブ映像を撮影する撮影手段である。遠隔の個人スペース81からライブ映像を見るユーザにフィットネスジム80の高揚した様子が臨場感を持って伝わり、フィットネスジム80で真剣にトレーニングを行うインストラクターや他のユーザから刺激を受けた遠隔ユーザがトレーニングへの没入感を高められるよう、複数のカメラ109を用いてダイナミックな映像が撮影される。トレーニング中は、トレーニングプログラム2で定められた処理方法や、ディレクター端末12eの随時操作によって、これらの映像が切り替わって表示画面13に表示される。なお、インストラクターがトレーニング内容を実演しながら説明する場面では、ユーザがそれをきちんと理解できるように、インストラクターの映像を多めに流すのが好ましい。
The camera 109 is a shooting means for shooting a live image of the fitness gym 80. The uplifting state of the fitness gym 80 is transmitted to the user who watches the live image from the remote personal space 81 with a sense of reality, and the training is conducted by the instructor who is seriously training at the fitness gym 80 and the remote user who is inspired by other users. A dynamic image is shot using a plurality of cameras 109 so as to enhance the immersive feeling. During the training, these images are switched and displayed on the display screen 13 by the processing method defined in the training program 2 or the operation of the director terminal 12e at any time. In addition, when the instructor explains the training content while demonstrating it, it is preferable to show a large amount of the instructor's image so that the user can understand it properly.
マイク110は、フィットネスジム80のライブ音声を取得する音声取得手段である。ライブ音声のうち最も重要なものは、インストラクターの指示音声やユーザを鼓舞する音声である。そのため、インストラクターがトレーニング中にハンズフリーで着用可能なピンマイク等を用いるのが好ましい。この他、フィットネスジム80のトレーニングスペース全体の音声を取得するマイク110を設けてもよいし、フィットネスジム80のユーザの音声を取得するマイク110を各ユーザ端末12a、12bに設けてもよい。これと同様に、遠隔ユーザのユーザ端末12cにマイクを設けて、そのユーザ音声を取得してもよい。この場合、後述する通信機能を介して、フィットネスジム80にいるインストラクターやユーザと、遠隔の個人スペース81にいるユーザの間で、トレーニング中の音声コミュニケーションが可能になる。
The microphone 110 is a voice acquisition means for acquiring the live voice of the fitness gym 80. The most important of the live voices are the instructor's instruction voice and the voice that inspires the user. Therefore, it is preferable to use a pin microphone or the like that the instructor can wear hands-free during training. In addition, a microphone 110 for acquiring the sound of the entire training space of the fitness gym 80 may be provided, or a microphone 110 for acquiring the sound of the user of the fitness gym 80 may be provided in each user terminal 12a and 12b. Similarly, a microphone may be provided in the user terminal 12c of the remote user to acquire the user voice. In this case, voice communication during training becomes possible between the instructor or user in the fitness gym 80 and the user in the remote personal space 81 via the communication function described later.
ディレクター端末12eは、トレーニングスペースまたはバックオフィスからトレーニングを監督するディレクターが使用する端末である。基本的にはユーザ端末12a、12b、12cと同様に構成すればよいが、ディレクターはトレーニングプログラム2の開始や終了、トレーニング中のトラブル対応や緊急停止等の各種の操作を行う必要があるため、操作部15の機能が充実している(詳細は画面例を参照して後述する)。また、ディレクターがバックオフィスからトレーニングを監督する場合は、パーソナルコンピュータ等の比較的大きな電子機器をディレクター端末12eとして使用できる。
The director terminal 12e is a terminal used by the director who supervises the training from the training space or the back office. Basically, it may be configured in the same manner as the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c, but since the director needs to perform various operations such as start and end of the training program 2, troubleshooting during training, and emergency stop. The functions of the operation unit 15 are substantial (details will be described later with reference to the screen example). Further, when the director supervises the training from the back office, a relatively large electronic device such as a personal computer can be used as the director terminal 12e.
トレーニングプログラム2は、EMS指示データ2A、映像データ2B、音声データ2Cを主な構成要素とし、それぞれのデータに基づく電気刺激(EMS)、映像、音声を組み合わせてトレーニング中のユーザに提供する。一つのトレーニングプログラム2の長さは任意であるが、例えば30分~60分程度に設定できる。また、後述するように、一つのトレーニングプログラム2を、例えば10分~20分程度の長さの複数のセットに分割してもよい。この場合、各セットの間に例えば5分程度のインターバルを設けて、リフレッシュや疲労回復を促し、次のセットに向けたユーザの集中力を高めることができる。なお、インターバルの間は電気刺激を停止してもよいが、映像や音声はリフレッシュに適したものを継続して流すのが好ましい。
The training program 2 has EMS instruction data 2A, video data 2B, and voice data 2C as main components, and provides the user during training by combining electrical stimulation (EMS), video, and voice based on the respective data. The length of one training program 2 is arbitrary, but can be set to, for example, about 30 to 60 minutes. Further, as will be described later, one training program 2 may be divided into a plurality of sets having a length of, for example, about 10 to 20 minutes. In this case, an interval of, for example, about 5 minutes may be provided between each set to promote refreshment and recovery from fatigue, and to enhance the user's concentration toward the next set. Although the electrical stimulation may be stopped during the interval, it is preferable to continuously play the video and audio suitable for refreshing.
EMS指示データ2Aは、トレーニングプログラム2実行中にユーザのEMS装置102によって付与する電気刺激を指示する。具体的には、トレーニングプログラム2実行中の任意の時間における電気刺激の周波数や強さ(レベル)を指示できる。また、このような周波数や強さを規則的に変化させることで、様々な電気刺激パターンを実現できる(小刻みでしびれるような電気刺激、ゆっくりとつまむような電気刺激など)。なお、後述するように、本実施形態では、電気刺激の強さは主にユーザやディレクターの操作に基づいて調整されるものとし、以下の説明ではEMS指示データ2Aは主に周波数を指示するものとする。
The EMS instruction data 2A instructs the electrical stimulation given by the user's EMS device 102 during the execution of the training program 2. Specifically, the frequency and intensity (level) of the electrical stimulus at any time during the execution of the training program 2 can be specified. In addition, various electrical stimulation patterns can be realized by regularly changing such frequencies and intensities (electrical stimulation that causes small numbness, electrical stimulation that slowly pinches, etc.). As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the intensity of the electrical stimulation is adjusted mainly based on the operation of the user or the director, and in the following description, the EMS instruction data 2A mainly indicates the frequency. And.
EMS指示データ2Aでは任意の周波数を指示できるが、トレーニング中の異なる目的あるいはフェーズに対して、以下のような周波数を用いることが好ましい。
4Hz~8Hz:プログラム開始時等のウォームアップフェーズにおいて、本格的なトレーニングフェーズに円滑に移行するため、4Hzで開始し、6Hzの中間段階を経て、8Hzまで増加させる。プログラム終了時等のクールダウンフェーズでは、逆に8Hz、6Hz、4Hzの順に周波数を低下させる。また、セット間のインターバルフェーズでもこの周波数帯を使用するのが好ましい。
4Hz:トレーニングフェーズにおいて、筋肉に単収縮を促して瞬間的な負荷をかける
20Hz:トレーニングフェーズにおいて、筋肉に不完全強縮を促して持続的な負荷をかける
このように、トレーニングフェーズでは主に4Hzと20Hzの周波数が用いられるが、時間的に織り交ぜることで、一つのトレーニングないしセット内で、単収縮と不完全強縮を組み合わせた効果的なトレーニングが可能になる。なお、図6に関して後述するように、EMS装置102の設定部56には、上記のような通電周波数、通電時間、通電パターン等が予め設定されたEMSモードが複数種類格納されており、EMS指示データ2Aは、トレーニングプログラム2の各セットにおけるEMSモードを指定するデータで構成される。 Although any frequency can be specified in theEMS instruction data 2A, it is preferable to use the following frequencies for different purposes or phases during training.
4Hz to 8Hz: In the warm-up phase such as at the start of the program, in order to smoothly shift to the full-scale training phase, the training is started at 4Hz and increased to 8Hz through the intermediate stage of 6Hz. In the cool-down phase such as at the end of the program, the frequency is lowered in the order of 8 Hz, 6 Hz, and 4 Hz. It is also preferable to use this frequency band in the interval phase between sets.
4Hz: In the training phase, a simple contraction is promoted to apply a momentary load to the muscle. 20Hz: In the training phase, incomplete tetanus is promoted to apply a continuous load. And 20Hz frequency is used, but by interweaving in time, effective training that combines simple contraction and incomplete tetanus becomes possible in one training or set. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, a plurality of types of EMS modes in which the above-mentioned energization frequency, energization time, energization pattern, etc. are preset are stored in thesetting unit 56 of the EMS device 102, and the EMS instruction is given. The data 2A is composed of data that specifies the EMS mode in each set of the training program 2.
4Hz~8Hz:プログラム開始時等のウォームアップフェーズにおいて、本格的なトレーニングフェーズに円滑に移行するため、4Hzで開始し、6Hzの中間段階を経て、8Hzまで増加させる。プログラム終了時等のクールダウンフェーズでは、逆に8Hz、6Hz、4Hzの順に周波数を低下させる。また、セット間のインターバルフェーズでもこの周波数帯を使用するのが好ましい。
4Hz:トレーニングフェーズにおいて、筋肉に単収縮を促して瞬間的な負荷をかける
20Hz:トレーニングフェーズにおいて、筋肉に不完全強縮を促して持続的な負荷をかける
このように、トレーニングフェーズでは主に4Hzと20Hzの周波数が用いられるが、時間的に織り交ぜることで、一つのトレーニングないしセット内で、単収縮と不完全強縮を組み合わせた効果的なトレーニングが可能になる。なお、図6に関して後述するように、EMS装置102の設定部56には、上記のような通電周波数、通電時間、通電パターン等が予め設定されたEMSモードが複数種類格納されており、EMS指示データ2Aは、トレーニングプログラム2の各セットにおけるEMSモードを指定するデータで構成される。 Although any frequency can be specified in the
4Hz to 8Hz: In the warm-up phase such as at the start of the program, in order to smoothly shift to the full-scale training phase, the training is started at 4Hz and increased to 8Hz through the intermediate stage of 6Hz. In the cool-down phase such as at the end of the program, the frequency is lowered in the order of 8 Hz, 6 Hz, and 4 Hz. It is also preferable to use this frequency band in the interval phase between sets.
4Hz: In the training phase, a simple contraction is promoted to apply a momentary load to the muscle. 20Hz: In the training phase, incomplete tetanus is promoted to apply a continuous load. And 20Hz frequency is used, but by interweaving in time, effective training that combines simple contraction and incomplete tetanus becomes possible in one training or set. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, a plurality of types of EMS modes in which the above-mentioned energization frequency, energization time, energization pattern, etc. are preset are stored in the
映像データ2Bは、トレーニング中、セット間のインターバル中、トレーニングの開始前や終了後などに表示画面13に表示させる既定の映像のデータである。後述するように、トレーニング中は、カメラ109で撮影されるフィットネスジム80のライブ映像が主に表示されるため、既定の映像が全画面で表示される機会は少ないが、フィットネスジム80の映像による紹介や、トレーニング内容の映像による説明の際に適宜用いることができる。また、何らかのトラブルでフィットネスジム80のライブ映像が表示できない場合に流すバックアップ用の映像を映像データ2B中に格納しておくこともできる。全画面表示以外の映像データ2Bの用途として、トレーニング中にインストラクターのライブ映像を表示している際、その背景にトレーニング動作の向き、大きさ、速さ、負荷等を一度に表しうるエフェクト映像を表示させてもよい。例えば、腕等を左に動かす動作を表すための左向きの矢印状の図形を表示する、バイク103のスピードを上げるべきときに画面の後方から前方に向かって順次近づいてくる一連の図形(例えば五角形)のスピードを上げる、ボクシングのように腕を突き出す動作を繰り返す際にそのタイミングで花火状の画像を明滅させる、負荷が大きい筋力トレーニングを行う際に力を込めるようにゆっくりと変化する波状の図形を表示する、等が考えられる。なお、フィットネスジム80でインストラクターをカメラ109で撮影する際に、その背景に上記のようなエフェクト映像を表示するスクリーン等が予め設けられている場合は、カメラ109で撮影されたライブ映像をそのまま使用すればよい。
The video data 2B is the default video data to be displayed on the display screen 13 during training, during the interval between sets, before and after the start of training, and the like. As will be described later, during training, the live image of the fitness gym 80 taken by the camera 109 is mainly displayed, so the default image is rarely displayed in full screen, but it depends on the image of the fitness gym 80. It can be used as appropriate for introductions and video explanations of training content. Further, it is also possible to store the backup video to be played when the live video of the fitness gym 80 cannot be displayed due to some trouble in the video data 2B. As an application of video data 2B other than full screen display, when displaying the instructor's live video during training, an effect video that can show the direction, size, speed, load, etc. of the training operation at once is displayed in the background. It may be displayed. For example, a series of figures (for example, a pentagon) that sequentially approach from the back to the front of the screen when the speed of the bike 103 should be increased, displaying a left-pointing arrow-shaped figure to represent the movement of the arm or the like to the left. ) Speed up, blink the fireworks-like image at the timing when repeating the movement of sticking out the arm like boxing, a wavy figure that slowly changes so that you can put in force when doing heavy strength training Is displayed, etc. When the instructor is photographed by the camera 109 in the fitness gym 80, if a screen or the like for displaying the above effect image is provided in advance in the background, the live image photographed by the camera 109 is used as it is. do it.
音声データ2Cは、トレーニングプログラム2の実行中にスピーカ14に再生させる既定の音声のデータである。トレーニングの開始前からトレーニングの終了後までの様々なフェーズに合わせて、適当な曲調のBGMを音声データ2Cとして用意するのが好ましい。非トレーニング時、例えば、トレーニングの開始前、セット間のインターバル中、トレーニングの終了後は、落ち着いた曲調のBGMを採用するのが好ましい。また、トレーニング中は、交感神経を刺激して激しい運動に適した心身の状態に誘導するようなBGM、例えば、テンポが速くリズムに富んだBGMを採用するのが好ましい。
The voice data 2C is the default voice data to be played back by the speaker 14 during the execution of the training program 2. It is preferable to prepare BGM with an appropriate musical tone as voice data 2C according to various phases from before the start of training to after the end of training. During non-training, for example, before the start of training, during the interval between sets, and after the end of training, it is preferable to adopt a calm tone BGM. Further, during training, it is preferable to employ a BGM that stimulates the sympathetic nerve and induces a mental and physical state suitable for strenuous exercise, for example, a BGM having a fast tempo and abundant rhythm.
トレーニング中のBGMはトレーニング効果を高める上で極めて重要な役割を担う。まず、インストラクターは、BGMのテンポ、リズム、音量に合わせて、トレーニング中の随意運動の各動作のタイミングを効果的に配置できる。例えば、ボクシングのように腕を突き出す動作を繰り返すトレーニングや、バイク103のようにペダルを漕ぐ動作を繰り返すトレーニングの場合、その各動作のタイミングをBGMのリズム、ビート、強弱の変化に同期させることで、ユーザは音楽に合わせてトレーニングを行う快感を得られ、疲労感を忘れてトレーニングに集中できる。さらに、EMS指示データ2Aによる電気刺激のパターンをBGMに同期させることで、上記の随意運動だけでなく、電気刺激による不随意運動も音声データ2Cに同期することになり、ユーザは両種の運動が音楽に同期していることによる快感を味わいながら、効果的なトレーニングを継続できる。また、表示画面13に表示されるインストラクターや他ユーザの動作が音楽に同期していることを視覚的に確認することで、彼らと一緒にトレーニングをしているという強い一体感と高揚感を得ることができる。
BGM during training plays an extremely important role in enhancing the training effect. First, the instructor can effectively arrange the timing of each movement of the voluntary movement during training according to the tempo, rhythm, and volume of the BGM. For example, in the case of training that repeats the movement of sticking out the arm like boxing and training that repeats the movement of pedaling like the bike 103, by synchronizing the timing of each movement with the change of BGM rhythm, beat, and strength. , The user can get the pleasure of training to the music and can forget the feeling of fatigue and concentrate on the training. Furthermore, by synchronizing the pattern of electrical stimulation by the EMS instruction data 2A with the BGM, not only the above-mentioned voluntary movements but also the involuntary movements by the electrical stimulation are synchronized with the voice data 2C, and the user can use both types of movements. You can continue to train effectively while enjoying the pleasure of being in sync with the music. Also, by visually confirming that the movements of the instructor and other users displayed on the display screen 13 are synchronized with the music, a strong sense of unity and exhilaration that they are training with them can be obtained. be able to.
以上のように、トレーニングプログラム2では、EMS指示データ2Aによる電気刺激、映像データ2Bによる映像、音声データ2Cによる音声、さらにはインストラクターによる動作指示を高い精度で同期させることが、ユーザの没入感を高めトレーニング効果を最大化する上で極めて重要である。フィットネスジム80内のユーザが上記の各データを現地で受け取る場合、伝送遅延差が無視できるためデータの同期状態は保たれるが、ネットワーク19を介して遠隔の個人スペース81で上記の各データを受け取る場合、伝送遅延差が無視できずデータの同期状態が崩れる可能性がある。そこで、本実施形態では、後述するように、上記の各データを遠隔ユーザに送信する際に、データの同期のための同期信号を付加する。
As described above, in the training program 2, the user's immersive feeling is achieved by synchronizing the electrical stimulation by the EMS instruction data 2A, the image by the video data 2B, the voice by the voice data 2C, and the operation instruction by the instructor with high accuracy. It is extremely important to maximize the training effect. When the user in the fitness gym 80 receives each of the above data locally, the synchronization state of the data is maintained because the transmission delay difference can be ignored, but each of the above data is stored in the remote personal space 81 via the network 19. When receiving, the transmission delay difference cannot be ignored and the data synchronization status may be disrupted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when each of the above data is transmitted to a remote user, a synchronization signal for data synchronization is added.
なお、以上のようなトレーニングプログラム2は、過去にライブ配信されたトレーニングをアーカイブしたものや、後日の配信用に記録したものを、EMS指示データ2A、映像データ2B、音声データ2Cからなる一つのパッケージとして用意してもよい。これらの記録されたトレーニングプログラム2は、ライブ配信と同様に開始時刻を指定して配信してもよいし、ユーザが好きな時間にトレーニングできるように常時配信可能な状態としてもよい。また、映像データ2Aや音声データ2Cは、一般的な映像ソフトウェアや音楽ソフトウェアのように、タブレットやスマートフォン等の携帯型電子機器やテレビ等の据付型電子機器で再生可能なフォーマットで用意すればよく、DVDやBlu-ray Disc(登録商標)等の記録媒体に格納した態様で提供してもよい。
In addition, the training program 2 as described above is one consisting of EMS instruction data 2A, video data 2B, and audio data 2C, which is an archive of training that was live-streamed in the past or recorded for distribution at a later date. It may be prepared as a package. These recorded training programs 2 may be delivered by designating a start time as in the case of live delivery, or may be in a state where they can be delivered at all times so that the user can train at a desired time. Further, the video data 2A and the audio data 2C may be prepared in a format that can be played on a portable electronic device such as a tablet or a smartphone or a stationary electronic device such as a television, like general video software or music software. , DVD, Blu-ray Disc (registered trademark), or the like, and may be provided in a form stored in a recording medium.
プログラム制御部3は、ユーザ端末12、機器情報取得部108、ディレクター端末12eによって、実行中のトレーニングプログラム2に対して各種の調整を行うために、トレーニング制御サーバ301と動画サーバ302を備える。トレーニング制御サーバ301は、トレーニング制御部3011と、同期信号生成部3012と、トレーニング情報送信部3013を備える。動画サーバ302は、映像制御部3Bと、音声制御部3Cと、同期信号生成部3021と、動画送信部3022を備える。
The program control unit 3 includes a training control server 301 and a video server 302 in order to make various adjustments to the training program 2 being executed by the user terminal 12, the device information acquisition unit 108, and the director terminal 12e. The training control server 301 includes a training control unit 3011, a synchronization signal generation unit 3012, and a training information transmission unit 3013. The video server 302 includes a video control unit 3B, an audio control unit 3C, a synchronization signal generation unit 3021, and a video transmission unit 3022.
トレーニング制御部3011は、ディレクター端末12eからのトレーニング開始の指示を受け、指定されたタイミングでEMS指示データ2Aに基づく電気刺激が付与されるよう制御データを生成する。トレーニング制御部3011は、通常時はトレーニングプログラム2に格納されたEMS指示データ2Aをそのまま取り込んで制御データとするが、ディレクター端末12eが緊急停止等の操作を行った場合は、全部または指定された一部のユーザに対するEMS指示データ2Aの提供を中止し、当該ユーザに対する電気刺激の付与を安全に停止させる。
The training control unit 3011 receives an instruction to start training from the director terminal 12e, and generates control data so that electrical stimulation based on the EMS instruction data 2A is applied at a designated timing. Normally, the training control unit 3011 takes in the EMS instruction data 2A stored in the training program 2 as it is and uses it as control data, but when the director terminal 12e performs an operation such as an emergency stop, all or the designated data is specified. The provision of the EMS instruction data 2A to some users is stopped, and the application of electrical stimulation to the users is safely stopped.
映像制御部3Bは、トレーニングプログラム2に格納された既定の映像データと、カメラ109で撮影されたライブ映像のデータを適宜組み合わせて、表示画面13に表示させる映像データを構成する。詳細は前述したが、非トレーニング時は主として既定の映像データを表示させ、トレーニング時は主としてライブ映像のデータを表示させる(ただし、前述した通り、フィットネスジム80のユーザの端末にはライブ映像を表示しなくてもよい)。音声制御部3Cは、トレーニングプログラム2に格納された既定のBGMに対して、マイク110で取得したフィットネスジム80のライブ音声を重畳し、スピーカ14に再生させる音声データを構成する(ただし、前述した通り、フィットネスジム80のユーザの端末にはライブ音声を再生しなくてもよい)。なお、緊急時は、ディレクター端末12eから緊急対応に関する音声を流すこともできる。
The video control unit 3B constitutes video data to be displayed on the display screen 13 by appropriately combining the default video data stored in the training program 2 and the live video data taken by the camera 109. Although the details are described above, the default video data is mainly displayed during non-training, and the live video data is mainly displayed during training (however, as described above, the live video is displayed on the terminal of the user of the fitness gym 80. You don't have to). The voice control unit 3C superimposes the live voice of the fitness gym 80 acquired by the microphone 110 on the default BGM stored in the training program 2 and configures the voice data to be reproduced by the speaker 14 (however, as described above). As you can see, it is not necessary to play live audio on the terminal of the user of fitness gym 80). In an emergency, the director terminal 12e can also play a voice regarding the emergency response.
このようにプログラム制御部3によって調整されたデータに基づき、ユーザに対する電気刺激付与、映像提供、音声提供が行われる。すなわち、トレーニング制御部3011によって調整されたEMS指示データに基づきEMS装置102がユーザに電気刺激を付与し、映像制御部3Bによって調整された映像データに基づき表示画面13に映像を表示させ、音声制御部3Cによって調整された音声データに基づきスピーカ14に音声を再生させる。以上のような構成において、EMS指示データ2Aおよびトレーニング制御部3011は、トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置(EMS装置102)によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部を構成し、映像データ2B、カメラ109、映像制御部3Bは、トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供部を構成し、音声データ2C、マイク110、音声制御部3Cは、トレーニング中にユーザが聞く音声データを提供する音声データ提供部を構成する。
Based on the data adjusted by the program control unit 3 in this way, electrical stimulation is given to the user, video is provided, and audio is provided. That is, the EMS device 102 applies electrical stimulation to the user based on the EMS instruction data adjusted by the training control unit 3011, displays the image on the display screen 13 based on the image data adjusted by the image control unit 3B, and controls the voice. The speaker 14 reproduces the sound based on the sound data adjusted by the unit 3C. In the above configuration, the EMS instruction data 2A and the training control unit 3011 provide the electrical stimulation instruction data providing the electrical stimulation instruction data given by the electrical stimulation device (EMS device 102) worn by the user during training. The video data 2B, the camera 109, and the video control unit 3B constitute a video data providing unit that provides video data to be viewed by the user during training, and the audio data 2C, the microphone 110, and the audio control unit 3C include the audio data 2C, the microphone 110, and the audio control unit 3C. A voice data providing unit that provides voice data that the user hears during training is configured.
トレーニング情報送信部3013は、トレーニング制御部3011を経たEMS指示データを、ネットワーク19を介して個人スペース81の遠隔ユーザに送信する。このとき、同期信号生成部3012が、EMS指示データで指示された電気刺激が然るべきタイミングで遠隔ユーザに付与されるよう、時刻情報を含む同期信号を生成する。動画送信部3022は、映像制御部3Bを経た映像データおよび音声制御部3Cを経た音声データからなる動画データを、ネットワーク19を介して個人スペース81の遠隔ユーザに送信する。このとき、同期信号生成部3021が、動画データが然るべきタイミングで遠隔ユーザに対して再生されるよう、時刻情報を含む同期信号を生成する。詳細は次に述べるが、EMS指示データについての同期信号と、動画データについての同期信号を受信側で照合することで、遠隔ユーザに対してもEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データの同期を取ることができる。受信部403は、ネットワーク19を介して遠隔のユーザ端末12cや機器情報取得部108cから各種のデータを受信する。
The training information transmission unit 3013 transmits the EMS instruction data that has passed through the training control unit 3011 to the remote user in the personal space 81 via the network 19. At this time, the synchronization signal generation unit 3012 generates a synchronization signal including time information so that the electrical stimulation instructed by the EMS instruction data is given to the remote user at an appropriate timing. The video transmission unit 3022 transmits video data consisting of video data that has passed through the video control unit 3B and audio data that has passed through the audio control unit 3C to a remote user in the personal space 81 via the network 19. At this time, the synchronization signal generation unit 3021 generates a synchronization signal including time information so that the moving image data is played back to the remote user at an appropriate timing. The details will be described below, but by collating the synchronization signal for the EMS instruction data with the synchronization signal for the moving image data on the receiving side, the EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data are synchronized even for the remote user. be able to. The receiving unit 403 receives various data from the remote user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c via the network 19.
図2に、同期信号生成部3012、3021で生成される同期信号と、送信部3013、3022で生成される送信信号の例を示す。図の左側に示されるように、EMS指示データ、動画データは、それぞれ一定時間長のパケットに分割されている。図示の例では、EMS指示データは、各時点におけるEMSモードを指定するものとして、二つのパケットEMS Mode #1とEMS Mode #2が示される。前述の通り、EMS指示データは予め設定されたEMSモードを指定するだけのものであり、そのデータ量は極めて少ない。また、これらのEMS指示データは、トレーニング開始時にまとめて送信できる(リアルタイムで送信する必要はない)。動画データは時間的に連続するパケットV#1, V#2…として図示される。これらの動画データは、フィットネスジム80のライブ映像およびライブ音声を含むため、トレーニング中にリアルタイムで送信する必要がある。
FIG. 2 shows an example of a synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation units 3012 and 3021 and a transmission signal generated by the transmission units 3013 and 3022. As shown on the left side of the figure, the EMS instruction data and the moving image data are each divided into packets having a fixed time length. In the illustrated example, the EMS instruction data indicates two packets EMS Mode # 1 and EMS Mode # 2 as specifying the EMS mode at each time point. As described above, the EMS instruction data only specifies the preset EMS mode, and the amount of the data is extremely small. In addition, these EMS instruction data can be collectively transmitted at the start of training (it is not necessary to transmit in real time). The moving image data is illustrated as time-continuous packets V # 1, V # 2, .... Since these video data include live video and live audio of the fitness gym 80, they need to be transmitted in real time during training.
図の右側の(A)および(B)は、同期信号の生成例を示す。図2(A)では、EMS指示データと動画データについて、同一のタイミングで同期信号が生成され、送信信号に挿入される。すなわち、トレーニング開始時刻情報を含む同期信号Sが、EMS Mode #1のパケットとV#1のパケットの前に挿入され、その所定時間後のEMS Mode #2のパケットとV#N+1の前に再びその時刻情報を含む同期信号Sが挿入される。これにより、データ量の多い動画データに伝送遅延が発生した場合も、受信側で同期信号Sを頼りにEMS指示データと動画データの同期を取ることができる。
(A) and (B) on the right side of the figure show an example of generating a synchronization signal. In FIG. 2A, a synchronization signal is generated at the same timing for the EMS instruction data and the moving image data, and is inserted into the transmission signal. That is, the synchronization signal S including the training start time information is inserted before the EMS Mode # 1 packet and the V # 1 packet, and before the EMS Mode # 2 packet and V # N + 1 after the predetermined time. The synchronization signal S including the time information is inserted into. As a result, even when a transmission delay occurs in the moving image data having a large amount of data, the receiving side can synchronize the EMS instruction data and the moving image data by relying on the synchronization signal S.
図2(B)では、EMS指示データと動画データについて、それぞれ任意のタイミングで同期信号が生成され、送信信号に挿入される。図示の例では、トレーニング開始時刻情報を含む同期信号Sは両データに共通して挿入されるが、以降はそれぞれ任意のタイミングで同期信号が挿入される。EMSモードについては、その切り替わりのタイミングに相当する同期信号だけを挿入すればよい。例えば、トレーニングが10分単位のセットに分割され、それぞれに一つのEMSモードが設定される場合は、その各セットの開始タイミングの時刻情報を同期信号として挿入すればよい。このように、EMS指示データの同期信号の挿入頻度は低くてよい。一方、時々刻々と変化する動画データには高頻度で同期信号を挿入することが好ましい。例えば、1秒、3秒、5秒、10秒などの頻度で挿入する。
In FIG. 2B, a synchronization signal is generated for each of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data at arbitrary timings and inserted into the transmission signal. In the illustrated example, the synchronization signal S including the training start time information is inserted in common to both data, but thereafter, the synchronization signal is inserted at an arbitrary timing. For the EMS mode, only the synchronization signal corresponding to the switching timing needs to be inserted. For example, when the training is divided into sets of 10 minutes and one EMS mode is set for each, the time information of the start timing of each set may be inserted as a synchronization signal. As described above, the frequency of inserting the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data may be low. On the other hand, it is preferable to insert a synchronization signal with high frequency in the moving image data that changes from moment to moment. For example, it is inserted at a frequency of 1 second, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and the like.
このような態様では、EMS指示データと動画データの同期信号の挿入頻度や挿入タイミングが異なるが、同期信号にはその時刻情報が含まれているため、受信側で問題なく同期できる。例えば、トレーニング開始時刻を14:00として、遠隔ユーザが遅れて14:05頃に参加した場合、まず高頻度で挿入された動画データの同期信号を探索する。そして、14:05の動画データの同期信号を見つけた場合、続いて14:05以前のEMS指示データの同期信号を探索する。EMS指示データの同期信号は低頻度なので、トレーニング開始時刻まで遡って14:00の同期信号が見つかったとする。このとき、遠隔ユーザのEMS装置102は、14:00の同期信号を起点にして、そこから5分経過後の14:05に付与すべき電気刺激のデータを読み出してユーザに電気刺激を付与する。このようにして、14:05に付与すべき電気刺激と、14:05に再生すべき動画が同期する。なお、このような同期処理によって、フィットネスジム80のインストラクターや他ユーザとの時間差が発生しうるが、せいぜい動画データの同期信号の挿入頻度の数秒程度に抑えることができるので大きな問題とはならない。インストラクターや他ユーザに対して遅延していたとしても、そのユーザが受け取るパケットは同期が取れているので、ユーザは遅延があることに気付かない。一点、図17に関して後述するインストラクターとの「コール&レスポンス」のやり取りにおいては遅延の影響が現れるが、これは多数のユーザのレスポンスに基づくトレーニングの盛り上がりの程度を示すものであり、数秒程度の遅延があっても大きな問題にはなるものではない。
In such an embodiment, the insertion frequency and insertion timing of the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data are different, but since the synchronization signal includes the time information, the receiving side can synchronize without any problem. For example, if the training start time is 14:00 and the remote user joins at around 14:05 with a delay, the synchronization signal of the video data inserted with high frequency is first searched. Then, when the synchronization signal of the moving image data at 14:05 is found, the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data before 14:05 is subsequently searched. Since the synchronization signal of the EMS instruction data is infrequent, it is assumed that the synchronization signal of 14:00 is found by going back to the training start time. At this time, the remote user's EMS device 102 reads out the electrical stimulation data to be applied at 14:05, 5 minutes after the synchronization signal at 14:00, and applies the electrical stimulation to the user. .. In this way, the electrical stimulus to be applied at 14:05 and the video to be played at 14:05 are synchronized. Although such a synchronization process may cause a time difference with the instructor of the fitness gym 80 and other users, it does not pose a big problem because the frequency of inserting the synchronization signal of the moving image data can be suppressed to about several seconds at most. Even if there is a delay to the instructor or another user, the user is unaware that there is a delay because the packets received by that user are synchronized. One point, regarding FIG. 17, the effect of delay appears in the exchange of "call & response" with the instructor, which will be described later, but this shows the degree of excitement of training based on the response of many users, and the delay is about several seconds. Even if there is, it does not become a big problem.
なお、以上の説明では、トレーニング制御サーバ301および動画サーバ302はいずれもフィットネスジム80に設置されるものとしたが、それぞれのサーバの全部または一部の機能をネットワーク19上のクラウドサーバ等で実現してもよい。
In the above explanation, both the training control server 301 and the video server 302 are installed in the fitness gym 80, but all or part of the functions of each server are realized by a cloud server or the like on the network 19. You may.
通信部5は、遠隔ユーザのいる個人スペース81において、フィットネスジム80のトレーニング制御サーバ301、動画サーバ302、受信部403との間でネットワーク19を介して通信する。通信部5は、データ同期部501と、受信部502と、送信部503を備える。これらの通信部5の機能は、タブレットやスマートフォン等の汎用の通信機器で構成されるユーザ端末12cで実現できる。受信部502は、送信部3013、3022から送信される、同期信号が付加されたEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを受信する。データ同期部501は、受信した同期信号に基づき、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを同期させる。送信部503は、ユーザ端末12cや機器情報取得部108cからの各種データを受信部403に送信する。
The communication unit 5 communicates with the training control server 301, the video server 302, and the reception unit 403 of the fitness gym 80 via the network 19 in the personal space 81 where the remote user is located. The communication unit 5 includes a data synchronization unit 501, a reception unit 502, and a transmission unit 503. These functions of the communication unit 5 can be realized by a user terminal 12c composed of a general-purpose communication device such as a tablet or a smartphone. The receiving unit 502 receives the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data to which the synchronization signal is added, which are transmitted from the transmitting units 3013 and 3022. The data synchronization unit 501 synchronizes the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the received synchronization signal. The transmission unit 503 transmits various data from the user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c to the reception unit 403.
データ同期部501は、受信した同期信号に基づき、図2で示される処理と逆の処理を行う。すなわち、図2(A)、(B)のいずれの態様の信号を受信したとしても、EMS指示データおよび動画データのそれぞれの同期信号Sを特定し、それを照合してEMS指示データ、動画データの各パケットを然るべき提供タイミングに配置する同期処理を行う。このように、遠隔の個人スペース81にいるユーザにも同期の取れた電気刺激(EMS装置102c)、映像(表示画面13c)、音声(スピーカ14c)を提供することが可能になる。なお、図2に関して前述したように、EMS指示データとしては各時点のEMSモードを指定するデータがネットワーク19を介して通信され、それを受信したEMS装置102cが電気刺激の周波数や強さ等の具体的な指示データを生成する。このとき、トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部の機能は、送信側のEMS指示データ2Aおよびトレーニング制御部3011だけでなく、受信側のEMS装置102cでも実現されている。
The data synchronization unit 501 performs the reverse processing of the processing shown in FIG. 2 based on the received synchronization signal. That is, regardless of which of the signals of FIGS. 2A and 2B is received, the synchronization signal S of each of the EMS instruction data and the moving image data is specified, and the synchronization signals S are collated with each other to identify the EMS instruction data and the moving image data. Performs synchronization processing to arrange each packet of the above at the appropriate provision timing. In this way, it becomes possible to provide synchronized electrical stimulation (EMS device 102c), video (display screen 13c), and voice (speaker 14c) to a user in a remote personal space 81. As described above with respect to FIG. 2, as EMS instruction data, data specifying the EMS mode at each time point is communicated via the network 19, and the EMS device 102c that receives the data determines the frequency and intensity of electrical stimulation. Generate specific instruction data. At this time, the function of the electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides the electrical stimulation instruction data given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training is not limited to the EMS instruction data 2A on the transmitting side and the training control unit 3011. , It is also realized in the EMS device 102c on the receiving side.
以上、図1を参照して運動制御システム100を概説したが、続いて各構成要素を詳細に説明する。
The motion control system 100 has been outlined with reference to FIG. 1, but each component will be described in detail.
図3は、ユーザがトレーニング中に着用するEMS装置102の一例であるフィットネスウェアの外観を模式的に示す。フィットネスウェア102は、ユーザが上半身に着用可能な上半身用衣服部120とユーザが下半身に着用可能な下半身用衣服部122の組合せで構成される。上半身用衣服部120は、前開きの半袖上着であり、正中線に沿う位置に設けられる正面ファスナー130によって正面が開け閉めされる。上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122は、身体に着用可能な形状の生地であって電気的絶縁体の生地である化学繊維生地で形成された衣服であり、着用者の体型を問わず身体にフィットさせるのに必要な高い伸縮性を有する。上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122は、インナーウェアを特に着ることなしに地肌に直接着用する。上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122の裏面には複数の電極が設けられる。各電極の配置については後述する。右袖の外側には袖口から肩先にかけて右腕ファスナー131が設けられ、左袖の外側にも袖口から肩先にかけて左腕ファスナー132が設けられる。右腕ファスナー131および左腕ファスナー132を閉めることによって袖周りをより緊密に腕にフィットさせることができる。左右袖口の裏側には、袖口内周に沿って滑り止めのゴム材が取り付けられ、運動時における袖口の捲れや捲り上がりを抑制できる。右脇には裾から脇の下にかけて右脇ファスナー133が設けられ、左脇にも裾から脇の下にかけて左脇ファスナー134が設けられる。右脇ファスナー133および左脇ファスナー134を閉めることによって裾周りをより緊密に胴回りへフィットさせることができる。裾周りの裏側にも、裾周り内周に沿って滑り止めのゴム材が取り付けられ、運動時における裾の捲れや捲り上がりを抑制できる。右脚の外側には裾口から右腰に向かって右脚ファスナー135が設けられ、左脚の外側にも裾口から左腰に向かって左脚ファスナー136が設けられる。右脚ファスナー135および左脚ファスナー136を閉めることによって裾周りをより緊密に脚にフィットさせることができる。左右裾口の裏側にも、裾口内周に沿って滑り止めのゴム材が取り付けられ、運動時における裾口の捲れや捲り上がりを抑制できる。このように、上半身用衣服部120および下半身用衣服部122の各所にファスナーを設けることにより、ファスナーの締め付けと生地の伸縮性によって、衣服全体を万遍なく身体にフィットさせることができ、電極の肌への接触状態を良好に維持できる。また、各ファスナーの閉め度合い(開け度合い)を調整することにより、ユーザの好みや体型に合わせて身体へのフィットの度合いを加減できる。
FIG. 3 schematically shows the appearance of fitness wear, which is an example of the EMS device 102 worn by the user during training. The fitness wear 102 is composed of a combination of an upper body garment portion 120 that can be worn by the user on the upper body and a lower body garment portion 122 that can be worn by the user on the lower body. The upper body garment portion 120 is a front-opening short-sleeved outerwear, and the front is opened and closed by a front fastener 130 provided at a position along the median line. The upper body garment portion 120 and the lower body garment portion 122 are garments having a shape that can be worn on the body and are made of a chemical fiber fabric that is an electrically insulating fabric, regardless of the wearer's body shape. Has the high elasticity needed to fit the body. The upper body garment section 120 and the lower body garment section 122 are worn directly on the skin without wearing any innerwear. A plurality of electrodes are provided on the back surfaces of the upper body garment portion 120 and the lower body garment portion 122. The arrangement of each electrode will be described later. A right arm fastener 131 is provided on the outside of the right sleeve from the cuffs to the shoulders, and a left arm fastener 132 is provided on the outside of the left sleeve from the cuffs to the shoulders. By closing the right arm fastener 131 and the left arm fastener 132, the sleeve circumference can be fitted to the arm more tightly. Non-slip rubber material is attached to the back side of the left and right cuffs along the inner circumference of the cuffs to prevent the cuffs from rolling up or rolling up during exercise. A right side fastener 133 is provided on the right side from the hem to the armpit, and a left side fastener 134 is also provided on the left side from the hem to the armpit. By closing the right side zipper 133 and the left side zipper 134, the hem circumference can be fitted tightly to the waist circumference. A non-slip rubber material is also attached to the back side around the hem along the inner circumference of the hem to prevent the hem from rolling up or rolling up during exercise. A right leg fastener 135 is provided on the outside of the right leg from the hem to the right hip, and a left leg fastener 136 is also provided on the outside of the left leg from the hem to the left hip. By closing the right leg fastener 135 and the left leg fastener 136, the hem circumference can be fitted to the leg more tightly. Non-slip rubber material is also attached to the back of the left and right hem along the inner circumference of the hem to prevent the hem from rolling up or rolling up during exercise. By providing fasteners in various places of the upper body garment portion 120 and the lower body garment portion 122 in this way, the entire garment can be evenly fitted to the body by tightening the fasteners and the elasticity of the fabric, and the electrodes can be used. Good contact with the skin can be maintained. In addition, by adjusting the degree of closing (opening degree) of each fastener, the degree of fit to the body can be adjusted according to the user's preference and body shape.
上半身用衣服部120の右脇より前面側の位置に、上半身用制御ユニット124が取り付けられる。同様に、下半身用衣服部122の左脚の前面側の位置に、下半身用制御ユニット126が取り付けられる。上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126は、各電極へ印加する電圧を制御する。上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126は、上半身と下半身に分かれた独立のユニットとして外部に露出する形で取り付けられる。上半身と下半身で制御ユニットを分けることにより、上半身と下半身を別々の運動強度(設定電圧値)でトレーニングすることができ、またユーザによっては上半身用の筋電気刺激装置と下半身用の筋電気刺激装置の一方のみを選択的に購入または使用することもできる。あるいは、上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126の起動時に近距離無線通信によってペアリングすることで連動させることもできる。その場合、上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126の一方を操作すれば他方も連動し、上半身用と下半身用の電気刺激装置を一括制御できる。上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126は、起動時に近距離無線通信によってユーザ端末12としての情報端末(タブレットやスマートフォン等)とペアリングすることで、情報端末にインストールされた制御アプリケーションによる制御を受けることもできる。その場合、上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126を別々に操作でき、または一括して操作することもできる。また、上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126は、正中線を挟んで左右に分かれた位置に取り付けられることから、身体前面において対角線上に位置する。したがって、身体を前屈したり大腿部ないし膝を上に持ち上げたりした場合でも、上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126が衝突して互いに干渉することを防止できる。
The upper body control unit 124 is attached to the position on the front side from the right side of the upper body clothing unit 120. Similarly, the lower body control unit 126 is attached to the position on the front side of the left leg of the lower body garment portion 122. The upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 control the voltage applied to each electrode. The upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are attached so as to be exposed to the outside as independent units separated into an upper body and a lower body. By separating the control unit for the upper body and the lower body, it is possible to train the upper body and the lower body with different exercise intensities (set voltage values), and depending on the user, the muscle electric stimulator for the upper body and the muscle electric stimulator for the lower body. It is also possible to selectively purchase or use only one of them. Alternatively, the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 can be linked by pairing by short-range wireless communication at the time of activation. In that case, if one of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 is operated, the other is also interlocked, and the electric stimulator for the upper body and the lower body can be collectively controlled. The upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are controlled by the control application installed in the information terminal by pairing with the information terminal (tablet, smartphone, etc.) as the user terminal 12 by short-range wireless communication at the time of activation. You can also receive. In that case, the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 can be operated separately or collectively. Further, since the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are attached to the left and right positions with the median line in between, they are located diagonally on the front surface of the body. Therefore, even when the body is bent forward or the thighs or knees are lifted upward, it is possible to prevent the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 from colliding with each other and interfering with each other.
図4は、フィットネスウェアのうち上半身用衣服部における電極の配置および配線を模式的に示す。図4(a)は上半身用衣服部120の前面側を示し、図4(b)は上半身用衣服部120の背面側を示す。上半身用衣服部120は、生地の裏面に各電極が配置されるとともに、生地の少なくとも一部が表地と裏地が重ねられた複層構造を有し、表地と裏地の間に電気ケーブルが配線される。電気ケーブルは、耐水性と伸縮性を有する。電極と電気ケーブル等の配置および配線は、実際には外観には現れないため、破線で描いて説明する。
FIG. 4 schematically shows the arrangement and wiring of electrodes in the upper body clothing portion of fitness wear. FIG. 4A shows the front side of the upper body garment portion 120, and FIG. 4B shows the back side of the upper body garment portion 120. The upper body garment portion 120 has a multi-layer structure in which each electrode is arranged on the back surface of the fabric and at least a part of the fabric is overlapped with the outer material and the lining, and an electric cable is wired between the outer material and the lining. Ru. Electric cables are water resistant and stretchable. Since the arrangement and wiring of the electrodes and the electric cables do not actually appear in the appearance, they will be described by drawing them with broken lines.
上半身用衣服部120の裏面における電極の部位は、電気刺激を与えるべき対象身体部位に対応する複数箇所であり、例えばユーザの腹筋、脇腹、腕などの各身体部位に対応する箇所である。各電極は、これらの電極間で所定の身体部位に通電し得るように分離した位置に設けられる。複数の電極は、それぞれ個別の電気ケーブル36によって第1制御ユニット接続部20aに電気的に接続される。第1制御ユニット接続部20aは、図3の上半身用制御ユニット124に対応する位置に設けられ、その第1制御ユニット接続部20aに上半身用制御ユニット124を取り付けたときに、第1制御ユニット接続部20aと上半身用制御ユニット124が電気的に接続される。各電極に接続された複数の電気ケーブル36は、伸縮性を有するとともに、各電極の手前で上半身用衣服部120に縫い付けられたケーブル留めテープ49に絡ませて位置固定することにより、上半身用衣服部120の伸縮に追随して電気ケーブル36が引っ張られた場合でも各電極から電気ケーブル36が外れるのを防止する。
The electrode parts on the back surface of the upper body clothing part 120 are a plurality of places corresponding to the target body parts to which electrical stimulation should be applied, and are the parts corresponding to each body part such as the user's abdomen, flank, and arm. Each electrode is provided at a position separated between these electrodes so that a predetermined body part can be energized. The plurality of electrodes are electrically connected to the first control unit connection portion 20a by individual electric cables 36. The first control unit connection unit 20a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper body control unit 124 in FIG. 3, and when the upper body control unit 124 is attached to the first control unit connection unit 20a, the first control unit connection unit is connected. The portion 20a and the upper body control unit 124 are electrically connected. The plurality of electric cables 36 connected to each electrode have elasticity and are entwined with a cable fastening tape 49 sewn to the upper body garment portion 120 in front of each electrode to fix the position of the upper body garment. Even when the electric cable 36 is pulled following the expansion and contraction of the portion 120, the electric cable 36 is prevented from coming off from each electrode.
腹筋に対応する箇所には、腹直筋を左右に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として右に第1電極部30a、左に第2電極部30bが設けられ、それぞれ第1電気ケーブル36a、第2電気ケーブル36bを介してこれらの電極間に上半身用制御ユニット124から電圧を印加することで腹直筋に電気刺激を与える。第1電極部30aの手前には第1ケーブル留めテープ49aが縫い付けられ、第1電極部30aと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第1電気ケーブル36aを第1ケーブル留めテープ49aに絡ませて位置固定する。第2電極部30bの手前には第2ケーブル留めテープ49bが縫い付けられ、左の腹筋の第2電極部30bから左脇腹、背中、右脇腹を通って前面側の第1制御ユニット接続部20aへ配線される第2電気ケーブル36bを第2ケーブル留めテープ49bに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the rectus abdominis muscle, a first electrode portion 30a is provided on the right and a second electrode portion 30b is provided on the left as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the rectus abdominis muscle on the left and right. Electrical stimulation is applied to the rectus abdominis muscle by applying a voltage from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via 36b. A first cable fastening tape 49a is sewn in front of the first electrode portion 30a, and the first electric cable 36a connecting the first electrode portion 30a and the first control unit connecting portion 20a is entwined with the first cable fastening tape 49a. And fix the position. A second cable fastening tape 49b is sewn in front of the second electrode portion 30b, and the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side passes from the second electrode portion 30b of the left abdominal muscle through the left flank, back, and right flank. The second electric cable 36b to be wired to is entwined with the second cable fastening tape 49b to fix the position.
右脇腹に対応する箇所には、右腹斜筋を前後に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として前面側に第3電極部30c、背面側に第4電極部30dが設けられ、それぞれ第3電気ケーブル36c、第4電気ケーブル36dを介してこれらの電極間に上半身用制御ユニット124から電圧を印加することで右の腹斜筋に電気刺激を与える。第3電極部30cの手前には第3ケーブル留めテープ49cが縫い付けられ、第3電極部30cと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第3電気ケーブル36cを第3ケーブル留めテープ49cに絡ませて位置固定する。第4電極部30dの手前には第4ケーブル留めテープ49dが縫い付けられ、背面側の第4電極部30dから右脇腹を通って前面側の第1制御ユニット接続部20aへ配線される第4電気ケーブル36dを第4ケーブル留めテープ49dに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the right flank, a third electrode portion 30c is provided on the front side and a fourth electrode portion 30d is provided on the back side as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the right abdominal oblique muscle in the anterior-posterior direction. A voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the fourth electric cable 36d to apply electrical stimulation to the right abdominal oblique muscle. A third cable fastening tape 49c is sewn in front of the third electrode portion 30c, and a third electric cable 36c connecting the third electrode portion 30c and the first control unit connecting portion 20a is entwined with the third cable fastening tape 49c. And fix the position. A fourth cable fastening tape 49d is sewn in front of the fourth electrode portion 30d, and is wired from the fourth electrode portion 30d on the back side to the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side through the right flank. The electric cable 36d is entwined with the fourth cable fastening tape 49d to fix the position.
左脇腹に対応する箇所には、左腹斜筋を前後に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として前面側に第5電極部30e、背面側には第6電極部30fが設けられ、それぞれ第5電気ケーブル36e、第6電気ケーブル36fを介してこれらの電極間に上半身用制御ユニット124から電圧を印加することで左の腹斜筋に電気刺激を与える。第5電気ケーブル36eは、前面側の左脇腹の第5電極部30eから背中を通って第4電極部30dに接続されることにより、その第4電極部30dを介して第1制御ユニット接続部20aに電気的に接続される。第5電極部30eの手前には第5ケーブル留めテープ49eが縫い付けられ、第5電気ケーブル36eを第5ケーブル留めテープ49eに絡ませて位置固定する。また、第5電気ケーブル36eは、第4電極部30dの手前に縫い付けられた第4ケーブル留めテープ49dにも絡ませて位置固定する。第6電極部30fの手前には第6ケーブル留めテープ49fが縫い付けられ、背面側の左脇腹の第6電極部30fから背中、右脇腹を通って前面側の第1制御ユニット接続部20aへ配線される第6電気ケーブル36fを第6ケーブル留めテープ49fに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the left flank, a fifth electrode portion 30e is provided on the front side and a sixth electrode portion 30f is provided on the back side as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the left abdominal oblique muscle in the anterior-posterior direction. , The left abdominal oblique muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the sixth electric cable 36f. The fifth electric cable 36e is connected to the fourth electrode portion 30d from the fifth electrode portion 30e on the left flank on the front side through the back, and thus the first control unit connection portion is connected via the fourth electrode portion 30d. It is electrically connected to 20a. A fifth cable fastening tape 49e is sewn in front of the fifth electrode portion 30e, and the fifth electric cable 36e is entwined with the fifth cable fastening tape 49e to fix the position. Further, the fifth electric cable 36e is also entwined with the fourth cable fastening tape 49d sewn in front of the fourth electrode portion 30d to fix the position. A sixth cable fastening tape 49f is sewn in front of the sixth electrode portion 30f, and the sixth electrode portion 30f on the left flank on the back side passes through the back and right flank to the first control unit connection portion 20a on the front side. The sixth electric cable 36f to be wired is entwined with the sixth cable fastening tape 49f to fix the position.
右腕に対応する箇所には、右の上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下から挟む陰陽一対の電極として上側(前面側)に第7電極部30g、下側(背面側)に第8電極部30hが設けられ、それぞれ第7電気ケーブル36g、第8電気ケーブル36hを介してこれらの電極間に上半身用制御ユニット124から電圧を印加することで右の上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋に電気刺激を与える。なお、第7電極部30gおよび第8電極部30hは、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下から挟む一方、電極サイズを必要以上に大きくはせず、第7電極部30gは上腕二頭筋の最も隆起した部分より前方向(肘方向)にずらした位置に配置し、第8電極部30hは上腕三頭筋の最も隆起した部分より後方向(肩方向)にずらした位置に配置している。これにより、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下からだけではなく前後からも挟むことができて配置の安定度を増すことができ、電気刺激の振動で両電極が筋肉の隆起部から同時に肩方向へずれてしまうのを防止できる。また、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下と前後の斜め対角線上に電気刺激を与えるため、各筋肉を比較的小さな面積の電極と小さな電力で効率よく筋肉に負荷を与えることができる。さらに、少ない数の電極と配線で上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋に電気刺激を与えることができ、腕の動作の妨げになることを抑制できる。第7電極部30gの手前には第7ケーブル留めテープ49gが縫い付けられ、第7電極部30gから前面側の右脇下を通って第1制御ユニット接続部20aへ配線される第7電気ケーブル36gを第7ケーブル留めテープ49gに絡ませて位置固定する。第8電極部30hの手前には第8ケーブル留めテープ49hが縫い付けられ、第8電極部30hから背面側の右脇下を通って第1制御ユニット接続部20aへ配線される第8電気ケーブル36hを第8ケーブル留めテープ49hに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the right arm, the 7th electrode portion 30g is on the upper side (front side) and the 8th electrode is on the lower side (back side) as a pair of negative and positive electrodes that sandwich the right triceps and triceps muscles from above and below. A portion 30h is provided, and a voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the 7th electric cable 36g and the 8th electric cable 36h, respectively, to the right triceps brachii muscle and triceps brachii muscle. Gives electrical stimulation. The 7th electrode portion 30g and the 8th electrode portion 30h sandwich the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle from above and below, but the electrode size is not increased more than necessary, and the 7th electrode portion 30g has two upper arms. The eighth electrode portion 30h is placed at a position shifted in the anterior direction (elbow direction) from the most raised part of the muscle, and the eighth electrode portion 30h is placed at a position shifted in the posterior direction (shoulder direction) from the most raised part of the triceps brachii muscle. ing. This makes it possible to pinch the biceps brachii and triceps brachii not only from above and below but also from the front and back, increasing the stability of placement, and the vibration of electrical stimulation causes both electrodes to simultaneously move from the bulge of the muscle. It is possible to prevent it from shifting toward the shoulder. In addition, since the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle are electrically stimulated diagonally up and down and back and forth, each muscle can be efficiently loaded with an electrode having a relatively small area and a small amount of power. Furthermore, it is possible to apply electrical stimulation to the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle with a small number of electrodes and wiring, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of arm movement. A 7th cable fastening tape 49g is sewn in front of the 7th electrode portion 30g, and a 7th electric cable is wired from the 7th electrode portion 30g through the right armpit on the front side to the 1st control unit connection portion 20a. 36g is entwined with 49g of the 7th cable fastening tape to fix the position. An eighth cable fastening tape 49h is sewn in front of the eighth electrode portion 30h, and an eighth electric cable is wired from the eighth electrode portion 30h to the first control unit connection portion 20a through the right armpit on the back side. The 36h is entwined with the 8th cable fastening tape 49h to fix the position.
左腕に対応する箇所には、左の上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下から挟む陰陽一対の電極として上側(前面側)に第9電極部30i、下側(背面側)に第10電極部30jが設けられ、それぞれ第9電気ケーブル36i、第10電気ケーブル36jを介してこれらの電極間に上半身用制御ユニット124から電圧を印加することで左の上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋に電気刺激を与える。なお、第9電極部30iおよび第10電極部30jは、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下から挟む一方、電極サイズを必要以上に大きくはせず、第9電極部30iは上腕二頭筋の最も隆起した部分より前方向(肘方向)にずらした位置に配置され、第10電極部30jは上腕三頭筋の最も隆起した部分より後方向(肩方向)にずらした位置に配置されている。これにより、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下からだけではなく前後からも挟むことができて配置の安定度を増すことができ、電気刺激の振動で両電極が筋肉の隆起部から同時に肩方向へずれてしまうのを防止できる。また、上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋を上下と前後の斜め対角線上に電気刺激を与えるため、各筋肉を比較的小さな面積の電極と小さな電力で効率よく筋肉に負荷を与えることができる。さらに、少ない数の電極と配線で上腕二頭筋および上腕三頭筋に電気刺激を与えることができ、腕の動作の妨げになることを抑制できる。第9電極部30iの手前には第9ケーブル留めテープ49iが縫い付けられ、第9電極部30iから前面側の左脇下を通って左脇腹、背中、右脇腹を通って前面側の第1制御ユニット接続部20aに配線される第9電気ケーブル36iを第9ケーブル留めテープ49iに絡ませて位置固定する。第10電極部30jの手前には第10ケーブル留めテープ49jが縫い付けられ、第10電極部30jから背面側の左脇下を通って左脇腹、背中、右脇腹を通って前面側の第1制御ユニット接続部20aに配線される第10電気ケーブル36jを第10ケーブル留めテープ49jに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the left arm, the 9th electrode portion 30i is on the upper side (front side) and the 10th electrode is on the lower side (back side) as a pair of negative and positive electrodes that sandwich the left triceps and triceps muscles from above and below. A portion 30j is provided, and a voltage is applied from the upper body control unit 124 between these electrodes via the 9th electric cable 36i and the 10th electric cable 36j, respectively, to the left triceps brachii muscle and triceps brachii muscle. Gives electrical stimulation. The 9th electrode portion 30i and the 10th electrode portion 30j sandwich the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle from above and below, but the electrode size is not increased more than necessary, and the 9th electrode portion 30i has two upper arms. The tenth electrode portion 30j is placed at a position shifted in the anterior direction (elbow direction) from the most raised part of the muscle, and the tenth electrode portion 30j is placed at a position shifted in the posterior direction (shoulder direction) from the most raised part of the triceps brachii muscle. ing. This makes it possible to pinch the biceps brachii and triceps brachii not only from above and below but also from the front and back, increasing the stability of placement, and the vibration of electrical stimulation causes both electrodes to simultaneously move from the bulge of the muscle. It is possible to prevent it from shifting toward the shoulder. In addition, since the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle are electrically stimulated diagonally up and down and back and forth, each muscle can be efficiently loaded with an electrode having a relatively small area and a small amount of power. Furthermore, it is possible to apply electrical stimulation to the biceps brachii muscle and the triceps brachii muscle with a small number of electrodes and wiring, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of arm movement. A ninth cable fastening tape 49i is sewn in front of the ninth electrode portion 30i, and the first one on the front side passes through the left flank, the back, and the right flank from the ninth electrode portion 30i through the left armpit on the front side. The ninth electric cable 36i wired to the control unit connection portion 20a is entwined with the ninth cable fastening tape 49i to fix the position. A tenth cable fastening tape 49j is sewn in front of the tenth electrode portion 30j. The tenth electric cable 36j wired to the control unit connection portion 20a is entwined with the tenth cable fastening tape 49j to fix the position.
第10電極部30jと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第10電気ケーブル36j、第9電極部30iと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第9電気ケーブル36i、第2電極部30bと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第2電気ケーブル36b、第5電極部30eと第4電極部30dを接続する第4電気ケーブル36d、第6電極部30fと第1制御ユニット接続部20aを接続する第6電気ケーブル36fの5本の電気ケーブル36は、背中の中央付近と右脇腹を通って背面側から前面側へ配線される。背中の中央付近においては、これら5本の電気ケーブル36を束ねるためのケーブル留めテープ59aが配置され、そのケーブル留めテープ59aによって5本の電気ケーブル36が背中の中央付近で束ねられる。ケーブル留めテープ59aは、上半身用衣服部120の背中中央付近に縫い付けられて固定されてもよい。
The tenth electric cable 36j connecting the tenth electrode portion 30j and the first control unit connecting portion 20a, the ninth electric cable 36i connecting the ninth electrode portion 30i and the first control unit connecting portion 20a, and the second electrode portion 30b. The second electric cable 36b for connecting the first control unit connection portion 20a, the fourth electric cable 36d for connecting the fifth electrode portion 30e and the fourth electrode portion 30d, the sixth electrode portion 30f and the first control unit connection portion 20a are connected. The five electric cables 36 of the sixth electric cable 36f to be connected are wired from the back side to the front side through the vicinity of the center of the back and the right flank. A cable fastening tape 59a for bundling these five electric cables 36 is arranged near the center of the back, and the cable fastening tape 59a bundles the five electric cables 36 near the center of the back. The cable fastening tape 59a may be sewn and fixed near the center of the back of the upper body garment portion 120.
以上のような配置および配線により、電気ケーブルを外部に露出することなく配線できる。また、上半身用制御ユニット124以外の構成は耐水性を有することから、上半身用制御ユニット124を外すだけで、電極部30や電気ケーブル36を外すことなくそのままフィットネスウェア102を洗濯することができる。なお、図においては上半身用衣服部120は主に男性用に電極が配置された例を示すが、女性用には電極の配置や大きさ等が異なってもよい。
With the above arrangement and wiring, the electric cable can be wired without being exposed to the outside. Further, since the configurations other than the upper body control unit 124 have water resistance, the fitness wear 102 can be washed as it is without removing the electrode portion 30 and the electric cable 36 only by removing the upper body control unit 124. In the figure, the upper body garment portion 120 shows an example in which electrodes are mainly arranged for men, but the arrangement and size of the electrodes may be different for women.
図5は、フィットネスウェアのうち下半身用衣服部における電極の配置および配線を模式的に示す。図5(a)は下半身用衣服部122の前面側を示し、図5(b)は下半身用衣服部122の背面側を示す。下半身用衣服部122は、生地の裏面に各電極が配置されるとともに、生地の少なくとも一部が表地と裏地が重ねられた複層構造を有し、表地と裏地の間に電気ケーブルが配線される。電気ケーブルは、耐水性と伸縮性を有する。電極と電気ケーブル等の配置および配線は、実際には外観には現れないため、破線で描いて説明する。
FIG. 5 schematically shows the arrangement and wiring of electrodes in the lower body clothing portion of fitness wear. FIG. 5A shows the front side of the lower body garment portion 122, and FIG. 5B shows the back side of the lower body garment portion 122. The lower body garment portion 122 has a multi-layer structure in which electrodes are arranged on the back surface of the fabric and at least a part of the fabric is overlapped with the outer material and the lining, and an electric cable is wired between the outer material and the lining. Ru. Electric cables are water resistant and stretchable. Since the arrangement and wiring of the electrodes and the electric cables do not actually appear in the appearance, they will be described by drawing them with broken lines.
下半身用衣服部122の裏面における電極の部位は、電気刺激を与えるべき対象身体部位に対応する複数箇所であり、例えばユーザの脚や臀部などの各身体部位に対応する箇所である。複数の電極は、それぞれ個別の電気ケーブル36によって第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第2制御ユニット接続部20bは、図3の下半身用制御ユニット126に対応する位置に設けられ、その第2制御ユニット接続部20bに下半身用制御ユニット126を取り付けたときに、第2制御ユニット接続部20bと下半身用制御ユニット126が電気的に接続される。各電極に接続された複数の電気ケーブル36は、伸縮性を有するとともに、各電極の手前で下半身用衣服部122に縫い付けられたケーブル留めテープ49に絡ませて位置固定することにより、下半身用衣服部122の伸縮に追随して電気ケーブル36が引っ張られた場合でも各電極から電気ケーブル36が外れるのを防止する。
The electrode parts on the back surface of the lower body clothing part 122 are a plurality of parts corresponding to the target body parts to which electrical stimulation should be applied, and are the parts corresponding to each body part such as the user's legs and buttocks. The plurality of electrodes are electrically connected to the second control unit connection portion 20b by individual electric cables 36. The second control unit connection unit 20b is provided at a position corresponding to the lower body control unit 126 in FIG. 3, and when the lower body control unit 126 is attached to the second control unit connection unit 20b, the second control unit is connected. The unit 20b and the lower body control unit 126 are electrically connected. The plurality of electric cables 36 connected to each electrode have elasticity and are entwined with a cable fastening tape 49 sewn to the lower body garment portion 122 in front of each electrode to fix the position of the lower body garment. Even when the electric cable 36 is pulled following the expansion and contraction of the portion 122, the electric cable 36 is prevented from coming off from each electrode.
右の前腿に対応する箇所には、右大腿四頭筋を上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部に第11電極部30k、下部に第12電極部30lが設けられ、それぞれ第11電気ケーブル36k、第12電気ケーブル36lを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで右大腿四頭筋に電気刺激を与える。第11電気ケーブル36kは、右前腿の第11電極部30kから股を通って左前腿の第13電極部30mに接続されることにより、その第13電極部30mを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第11電極部30kの手前には第11ケーブル留めテープ49kが縫い付けられ、第11電気ケーブル36kを第11ケーブル留めテープ49kに絡ませて位置固定する。第12電気ケーブル36lは、右前腿の第12電極部30lから股を通って左前腿の第14電極部30nに接続されることにより、その第14電極部30nを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第12電極部30lの手前には第12ケーブル留めテープ49lが縫い付けられ、第12電気ケーブル36lを第12ケーブル留めテープ49lに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the right anterior thigh, the 11th electrode portion 30k is provided at the upper part and the 12th electrode portion 30l is provided at the lower part as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the right quadriceps muscle up and down, and the 11th electric cable 36k respectively. , The right quadriceps muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 12th electric cable 36l. The eleventh electric cable 36k is connected to the thirteenth electrode portion 30m of the left front thigh from the eleventh electrode portion 30k of the right front thigh through the crotch, and thus the second control unit connection portion is connected via the thirteenth electrode portion 30m. It is electrically connected to 20b. The eleventh cable fastening tape 49k is sewn in front of the eleventh electrode portion 30k, and the eleventh electric cable 36k is entwined with the eleventh cable fastening tape 49k to fix the position. The 12th electric cable 36l is connected to the 14th electrode portion 30n of the left front thigh from the 12th electrode portion 30l of the right front thigh through the crotch, and thus the second control unit connection portion is connected via the 14th electrode portion 30n. It is electrically connected to 20b. A twelfth cable fastening tape 49l is sewn in front of the twelfth electrode portion 30l, and the twelfth electric cable 36l is entwined with the twelfth cable fastening tape 49l to fix the position.
左の前腿に対応する箇所には、左大腿四頭筋を上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部に第13電極部30m、下部に第14電極部30nが設けられ、それぞれ第13電気ケーブル36m、第14電気ケーブル36nを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで左大腿四頭筋に電気刺激を与える。第13電極部30mの手前には第13ケーブル留めテープ49mが縫い付けられ、第13電極部30mと第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第13電気ケーブル36mと第11電気ケーブル36kを第13ケーブル留めテープ49mに絡ませて位置固定する。第14電極部30nの手前には第14ケーブル留めテープ49nが縫い付けられ、第14電極部30nと第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第14電気ケーブル36nと第12電気ケーブル36lを第14ケーブル留めテープ49nに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the left front thigh, a 13th electrode portion 30m is provided at the upper part and a 14th electrode portion 30n is provided at the lower part as a pair of yin-yang electrodes straddling the left quadriceps muscle up and down, and the 13th electric cable 36m, respectively. , The left quadriceps muscle is electrically stimulated by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 14th electric cable 36n. A thirteenth cable fastening tape 49m is sewn in front of the thirteenth electrode portion 30m, and the thirteenth electric cable 36m and the eleventh electric cable 36k connecting the thirteenth electrode portion 30m and the second control unit connection portion 20b are sewn to the thirteenth. Tangle it with the cable fastening tape 49m and fix the position. A 14th cable fastening tape 49n is sewn in front of the 14th electrode portion 30n, and the 14th electric cable 36n and the 12th electric cable 36l connecting the 14th electrode portion 30n and the second control unit connecting portion 20b are connected to the 14th. Entangled with the cable fastening tape 49n and fixed in position.
右の腿裏に対応する箇所には、右の大腿二頭筋等のハムストリングスを上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部に第15電極部30o、下部に第16電極部30pが設けられ、それぞれ第15電気ケーブル36o、第16電気ケーブル36pを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで右の大腿二頭筋等のハムストリングスに電気刺激を与える。第15電気ケーブル36oは、右腿裏の第15電極部30oから股を通って左腿裏の第17電極部30qに接続されることにより、その第17電極部30qを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第15電極部30oの手前には第15ケーブル留めテープ49oが縫い付けられ、第15電気ケーブル36oを第15ケーブル留めテープ49oに絡ませて位置固定する。第16電気ケーブル36pは、右腿裏の第16電極部30pから股を通って左腿裏の第18電極部30rに接続されることにより、その第18電極部30rを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第16電極部30pの手前には第16ケーブル留めテープ49pが縫い付けられ、第16電気ケーブル36pを第16ケーブル留めテープ49rに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the back of the right thigh, a 15th electrode portion 30o is provided at the upper part and a 16th electrode portion 30p is provided at the lower part as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the hamstrings such as the right biceps femoris up and down. By applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 15th electric cable 36o and the 16th electric cable 36p, electrical stimulation is applied to the ham strings such as the right biceps femoris. The 15th electric cable 36o is connected to the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh from the 15th electrode portion 30o on the back of the right thigh through the crotch, and the second control unit is connected to the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b. A fifteenth cable fastening tape 49o is sewn in front of the fifteenth electrode portion 30o, and the fifteenth electric cable 36o is entwined with the fifteenth cable fastening tape 49o to fix the position. The 16th electric cable 36p is connected to the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh from the 16th electrode portion 30p on the back of the right thigh through the crotch, and the second control unit is connected to the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b. The 16th cable fastening tape 49p is sewn in front of the 16th electrode portion 30p, and the 16th electric cable 36p is entwined with the 16th cable fastening tape 49r to fix the position.
左の腿裏に対応する箇所には、左の大腿二頭筋等のハムストリングスを上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部に第17電極部30q、下部に第18電極部30rが設けられ、それぞれ第17電気ケーブル36q、第18電気ケーブル36rを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで左の大腿二頭筋等のハムストリングスに電気刺激を与える。第17電極部30qの手前には第17ケーブル留めテープ49qが縫い付けられ、左腿裏の第17電極部30qから左前腿の第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第17電気ケーブル36qと第15電気ケーブル36oを第17ケーブル留めテープ49qに絡ませて位置固定する。第18電極部30rの手前には第18ケーブル留めテープ49rが縫い付けられ、左腿裏の第18電極部30rと左前腿の第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第18電気ケーブル36rと第16電気ケーブル36pを第18ケーブル留めテープ49rに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the back of the left thigh, a 17th electrode portion 30q is provided at the upper part and an 18th electrode portion 30r is provided at the lower part as a pair of negative and positive electrodes straddling the hamstrings such as the left biceps femoris up and down. By applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 17th electric cable 36q and the 18th electric cable 36r, electrical stimulation is applied to the ham strings such as the left biceps femoris. The 17th cable fastening tape 49q is sewn in front of the 17th electrode portion 30q, and the 17th electric cable 36q and the 17th electric cable 36q connecting the 17th electrode portion 30q on the back of the left thigh to the second control unit connecting portion 20b on the left front thigh. 15 The electric cable 36o is entwined with the 17th cable fastening tape 49q to fix the position. The 18th cable fastening tape 49r is sewn in front of the 18th electrode portion 30r, and the 18th electric cable 36r and the 18th electric cable 36r connecting the 18th electrode portion 30r on the back of the left thigh and the second control unit connecting portion 20b on the left front thigh are sewn. The 16 electric cable 36p is entwined with the 18th cable fastening tape 49r to fix the position.
右の臀部に対応する箇所には、右の大臀筋、中臀筋を上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部外側の中臀筋付近に第19電極部30s、下部内側の大臀筋付近に第20電極部30tが設けられ、それぞれ第19電気ケーブル36s、第20電気ケーブル36tを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで右の大臀筋、中臀筋に電気刺激を与える。第19電気ケーブル36sは、右臀部の第19電極部30sから上臀部中央を通って左臀部の第21電極部30uに接続されることにより、その第21電極部30uを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第19電極部30sの手前には第19ケーブル留めテープ49sが縫い付けられ、第19電気ケーブル36sを第19ケーブル留めテープ49sに絡ませて位置固定する。第20電気ケーブル36tは、右臀部の第20電極部30tから上臀部中央を通って左臀部の第22電極部30vに接続されることにより、その第22電極部30vを介して第2制御ユニット接続部20bに電気的に接続される。第20電極部30tの手前には第20ケーブル留めテープ49tが縫い付けられ、第20電気ケーブル36tを第20ケーブル留めテープ49tに絡ませて位置固定する。
At the location corresponding to the right gluteus maximus, the 19th electrode 30s near the upper outer gluteus medius and the lower inner gluteus maximus as a pair of yin-yang electrodes that straddle the right gluteus maximus and gluteus medius up and down. The 20th electrode portion 30t is provided, and the right gluteus maximus and gluteus medius muscles are provided by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 19th electric cable 36s and the 20th electric cable 36t, respectively. Gives electrical stimulation to. The 19th electric cable 36s is connected to the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left buttock from the 19th electrode portion 30s of the right buttock through the center of the upper buttock, and thus the second control unit is connected to the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left buttock portion via the 21st electrode portion 30u. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b. The 19th cable fastening tape 49s is sewn in front of the 19th electrode portion 30s, and the 19th electric cable 36s is entwined with the 19th cable fastening tape 49s to fix the position. The 20th electric cable 36t is connected to the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left buttock from the 20th electrode portion 30t of the right buttock through the center of the upper buttock, and thus the second control unit is connected to the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left buttock. It is electrically connected to the connection portion 20b. A 20th cable fastening tape 49t is sewn in front of the 20th electrode portion 30t, and the 20th electric cable 36t is entwined with the 20th cable fastening tape 49t to fix the position.
左の臀部に対応する箇所には、左の大臀筋、中臀筋を上下に跨ぐ陰陽一対の電極として上部外側の中臀筋付近に第21電極部30u、下部内側の大臀筋付近に第22電極部30vが設けられ、それぞれ第21電気ケーブル36u、第22電気ケーブル36vを介してこれらの電極間に下半身用制御ユニット126から電圧を印加することで左の大臀筋、中臀筋に電気刺激を与える。第21電極部30uの手前には第21ケーブル留めテープ49uが縫い付けられ、左中臀筋の第21電極部30uから左前腿の第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第21電気ケーブル36uと第19電気ケーブル36sを第21ケーブル留めテープ49uに絡ませて位置固定する。第22電極部30vの手前には第22ケーブル留めテープ49vが縫い付けられ、左大臀筋の第22電極部30vから左前腿の第2制御ユニット接続部20bを接続する第22電気ケーブル36vと第20電気ケーブル36tを第22ケーブル留めテープ49vに絡ませて位置固定する。
In the part corresponding to the left gluteus maximus, the 21st electrode part 30u near the upper outer gluteus medius muscle and the lower inner gluteus maximus muscle as a pair of yin and yang electrodes that straddle the left gluteus maximus and gluteus medius up and down. The 22nd electrode portion 30v is provided, and the left gluteus maximus and gluteus medius muscles are provided by applying a voltage from the lower body control unit 126 between these electrodes via the 21st electric cable 36u and the 22nd electric cable 36v, respectively. Gives electrical stimulation to. A 21st cable fastening tape 49u is sewn in front of the 21st electrode portion 30u, and a 21st electric cable 36u connecting the 21st electrode portion 30u of the left gluteus medius muscle to the 2nd control unit connection portion 20b of the left front thigh. The 19th electric cable 36s is entwined with the 21st cable fastening tape 49u to fix the position. A 22nd cable fastening tape 49v is sewn in front of the 22nd electrode portion 30v, and a 22nd electric cable 36v connecting the 22nd electrode portion 30v of the left gluteus maximus to the 2nd control unit connection portion 20b of the left front thigh. The 20th electric cable 36t is entwined with the 22nd cable fastening tape 49v to fix the position.
第11電極部30kと第13電極部30mを接続する第11電気ケーブル36kと、第12電極部30lと第14電極部30nを接続する第12電気ケーブル36lと、第15電極部30oと第17電極部30qを接続する第15電気ケーブル36oと、第16電極部30pと第18電極部30rを接続する第16電気ケーブル36pとを固定するためのケーブル留めテープ59bが下半身用衣服部122の股付近の生地に縫い付けられ、そのケーブル留めテープ59bによって4本の電気ケーブル36が束ねられて股付近に固定される。第19電極部30sと第21電極部30uを接続する第19電気ケーブル36sと、第20電極部30tと第22電極部30vを接続する第20電気ケーブル36tとを固定するためのケーブル留めテープ59cが下半身用衣服部122の上臀部中央付近の生地に縫い付けられ、そのケーブル留めテープ59cによって2本の電気ケーブル36が束ねられて上臀部中央付近に固定される。
The eleventh electric cable 36k connecting the eleventh electrode portion 30k and the thirteenth electrode portion 30m, the twelfth electric cable 36l connecting the twelfth electrode portion 30l and the fourteenth electrode portion 30n, the fifteenth electrode portion 30o and the seventeenth. The cable fastening tape 59b for fixing the 15th electric cable 36o connecting the electrode portion 30q and the 16th electric cable 36p connecting the 16th electrode portion 30p and the 18th electrode portion 30r is attached to the crotch of the lower body garment portion 122. It is sewn to a fabric in the vicinity, and four electric cables 36 are bundled and fixed in the vicinity of the crotch by the cable fastening tape 59b. Cable fastening tape 59c for fixing the 19th electric cable 36s connecting the 19th electrode portion 30s and the 21st electrode portion 30u and the 20th electric cable 36t connecting the 20th electrode portion 30t and the 22nd electrode portion 30v. Is sewn to the fabric near the center of the upper buttock of the lower body garment portion 122, and the two electric cables 36 are bundled by the cable fastening tape 59c and fixed near the center of the upper buttock portion.
以上のような配置および配線により、電気ケーブルを外部に露出することなく配線できる。また、下半身用制御ユニット126以外の構成は耐水性を有することから、下半身用制御ユニット126を外すだけで、電極部30や電気ケーブル36を外すことなくそのままフィットネスウェア102を洗濯することができる。なお、図において下半身用衣服部122もまた主に男性用に電極が配置された例を示すが、女性用には電極の配置や大きさ等が異なってもよい。
With the above arrangement and wiring, the electric cable can be wired without being exposed to the outside. Further, since the configurations other than the lower body control unit 126 have water resistance, the fitness wear 102 can be washed as it is without removing the electrode portion 30 and the electric cable 36 only by removing the lower body control unit 126. In the figure, the lower body garment portion 122 also shows an example in which electrodes are arranged mainly for men, but the arrangement and size of the electrodes may be different for women.
以上、図3~図5を参照して説明したフィットネスウェア102は、フィットネスジム80でのトレーニングの際は、通常、その場で貸与されるものを着用してトレーニングを行い、トレーニング後は返却する。一方、個人スペース81でのトレーニングの際は、以下のような手順に従うことで、ユーザ自身がトレーニング前のフィットネスウェア102の準備や、トレーニング後のフィットネスウェア102の洗濯等の手入れを行うことができる。
The fitness wear 102 described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5 is usually worn on the spot for training when training at the fitness gym 80, and is returned after the training. .. On the other hand, when training in the personal space 81, the user himself / herself can prepare the fitness wear 102 before training and perform maintenance such as washing the fitness wear 102 after training by following the following procedure. ..
トレーニング前の準備では、フィットネスウェア102を裏返し、霧吹き等で全ての電極部30を水で濡らす。電極部30を濡らすことで、肌との接触性を良好に保ち、かつ広い接触面積を確保することで、局所的に強い電気刺激が付与されることを防止する。その後、フィットネスウェア102を表に返して、全てのファスナーを開いた上で着用する。着用後はファスナーを閉じるが、電極部30が肌に密着するように各ファスナーの開閉具合を調節する。また、上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122を同時に着用する際は、両衣服部を連結する連結ボタンを留めることで、着用時の位置ずれを防止できる。最後に、上半身用衣服部120に上半身用制御ユニット124を取り付け、下半身用衣服部122に下半身用制御ユニット126を取り付けることでトレーニング前の準備が完了する。
In preparation before training, turn over the fitness wear 102 and wet all the electrode parts 30 with water by spraying or the like. By wetting the electrode portion 30, the good contact with the skin is maintained, and by securing a wide contact area, it is possible to prevent a strong electrical stimulus from being locally applied. After that, turn the fitness wear 102 over and open all the fasteners before wearing it. After wearing, the fasteners are closed, but the degree of opening and closing of each fastener is adjusted so that the electrode portion 30 is in close contact with the skin. Further, when the upper body garment part 120 and the lower body garment part 122 are worn at the same time, the position shift at the time of wearing can be prevented by fastening the connecting button connecting both the garment parts. Finally, the preparation before training is completed by attaching the upper body control unit 124 to the upper body garment unit 120 and attaching the lower body control unit 126 to the lower body garment unit 122.
続いて、トレーニングを開始する際は、上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126の電源を入れる。そして、図13を参照して後述するように、両制御ユニットのシンクロ設定、両制御ユニットとアプリとのペアリング設定を行う。そして、図14(B)を参照して後述するように、EMSモードの設定を行い、図15(A)を参照して後述するように、EMSレベルの設定を行う。これにより、所望のEMSモードとEMSレベルでのトレーニングを開始できる。
Subsequently, when starting training, turn on the power of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126. Then, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, the synchronization setting of both control units and the pairing setting of both control units and the application are performed. Then, the EMS mode is set as described later with reference to FIG. 14 (B), and the EMS level is set as described later with reference to FIG. 15 (A). This allows training at the desired EMS mode and EMS level to begin.
トレーニング後は、上半身用衣服部120から上半身用制御ユニット124を取り外し、下半身用衣服部122から下半身用制御ユニット126を取り外す。続いて、全てのファスナーを開けて、フィットネスウェア102を脱ぐ。脱いだフィットネスウェア102は、そのまま洗濯機等で洗濯できる。
After training, the upper body control unit 124 is removed from the upper body garment unit 120, and the lower body control unit 126 is removed from the lower body garment unit 122. Then, open all the fasteners and take off the fitness wear 102. The removed fitness wear 102 can be washed in a washing machine or the like as it is.
なお、フィットネスウェア102をユーザ個人で洗濯する際、フィットネスウェア102の機能や性能を損なわないための以下のような点に留意しつつ、任意の方法で洗濯できる。フィットネスウェア120の裏面に設けられた電極の保護のため、裏返さずに洗濯するのが好ましい。洗濯時にファスナーの開閉部分に過大な負荷がかからないように全てのファスナーを閉じる。フィットネスウェア120の破損を避けるため、一度に多数のフィットネスウェア120を洗濯機に入れないように留意する。例えば、最大でも5枚までとする。洗濯方法は任意であるが、洗濯中に過大な負荷がかからないようにフィットネスウェア120は洗濯ネットに入れてデリケート洗いをするか、手洗いをするのが好ましい。同様に、洗剤はフィットネスウェア120を傷めないものが好ましく、例えば衣類用の中性洗剤を使用するとよい。逆に、塩素系漂白剤、酸性洗剤、柔軟剤などの使用は避けるのが好ましい。また、脱水の際は、手絞りの場合は弱く、遠心脱水の場合は短時間で絞ることでフィットネスウェア120への負担を軽減する。脱水後は濡れたまま放置せず、直射日光を避けて陰干しするのが好ましく、タンブル乾燥機やアイロンの使用は避けるのが好ましい。その他、手入れ時は、電極部を強くこすらず、シンナー、ベンジン、アルコールなどでは拭かないように留意する。
When the fitness wear 102 is washed by the individual user, it can be washed by any method while paying attention to the following points so as not to impair the function and performance of the fitness wear 102. In order to protect the electrodes provided on the back surface of the fitness wear 120, it is preferable to wash without turning over. Close all fasteners so that the opening and closing parts of the fasteners are not overloaded during washing. To avoid damaging the fitness wear 120, be careful not to put many fitness wear 120 in the washing machine at once. For example, the maximum number is five. The washing method is arbitrary, but it is preferable to put the fitness wear 120 in a washing net for delicate washing or hand washing so that an excessive load is not applied during washing. Similarly, the detergent preferably does not damage the fitness wear 120, for example, a neutral detergent for clothing may be used. On the contrary, it is preferable to avoid the use of chlorine bleach, acid detergent, fabric softener and the like. Further, in the case of dehydration, the hand squeezing is weak, and in the case of centrifugal dehydration, squeezing is performed in a short time to reduce the burden on the fitness wear 120. After dehydration, it is preferable not to leave it wet and to dry it in the shade away from direct sunlight, and it is preferable to avoid using a tumble dryer or an iron. In addition, when cleaning, be careful not to rub the electrodes strongly and do not wipe with thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
図6は、制御ユニットの機能構成を示すブロック図である。制御ユニット128は、電源部22、制御部28、無線通信部58を備える。電源部22、制御部28、無線通信部58は、制御ユニット接続部20に取り付け可能な形状の筐体に収められる。制御部28は、電源制御部50、通電検知部52、電気刺激制御部54、設定部56を含む。制御ユニット128としては、上半身用衣服部120に取り付けられる上半身用制御ユニット124と、下半身用衣服部122に取り付けられる下半身用制御ユニット126があり、それぞれ同じ構成を有する。ただし、変形例として、上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126とで構成ないし形状に違いがあってもよい。
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control unit. The control unit 128 includes a power supply unit 22, a control unit 28, and a wireless communication unit 58. The power supply unit 22, the control unit 28, and the wireless communication unit 58 are housed in a housing having a shape that can be attached to the control unit connection unit 20. The control unit 28 includes a power supply control unit 50, an energization detection unit 52, an electrical stimulation control unit 54, and a setting unit 56. The control unit 128 includes an upper body control unit 124 attached to the upper body garment unit 120 and a lower body control unit 126 attached to the lower body garment unit 122, each of which has the same configuration. However, as a modification, there may be a difference in configuration or shape between the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126.
制御部28の各ブロックは、ハードウェア的には、集積回路をはじめとする素子や機械装置で実現でき、ソフトウェア的にはコンピュータプログラム等によって実現されるが、ここでは、それらの連携によって実現される機能ブロックを描いている。したがって、これらの機能ブロックはハードウェア、ソフトウェアの組合せによっていろいろなかたちで実現できることは、本明細書に触れた当業者には理解されるところである。以降の他のブロック図についても同様である。
Each block of the control unit 28 can be realized by an element such as an integrated circuit or a mechanical device in terms of hardware, and is realized by a computer program or the like in terms of software, but here, it is realized by their cooperation. I'm drawing a functional block. Therefore, it is understood by those skilled in the art who have touched this specification that these functional blocks can be realized in various forms by combining hardware and software. The same applies to the other block diagrams thereafter.
電源部22は、リチウムイオン電池等の二次電池であるが、交換可能な一次電池であってもよい。電源部22は、無線通信部58としての無線通信モジュールと、制御部28としての制御回路に電気的に接続され、それぞれに電力を供給する。なお、制御ユニット128に電源ボタンが設けられてもよく、その電源ボタンの操作に応じて電源部22をオン/オフしてもよい。
The power supply unit 22 is a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, but may be a replaceable primary battery. The power supply unit 22 is electrically connected to a wireless communication module as a wireless communication unit 58 and a control circuit as a control unit 28, and supplies electric power to each of them. The control unit 128 may be provided with a power button, and the power supply unit 22 may be turned on / off according to the operation of the power button.
電源制御部50は、電源部22の充電を制御するとともに、充電状態を示す情報を無線通信部58を介してユーザ端末12へ送信する。通電検知部52は、電極間で通電可能であるかを検知するために、陽極と陰極の電極間で抵抗値を検出する。例えば上半身用制御ユニット124の通電検知部52は、腹筋に対応する第1電極部30aと第2電極部30bの間、右脇腹に対応する第3電極部30cと第4電極部30dの間、左脇腹に対応する第5電極部30eと第6電極部30fの間、右腕に対応する第7電極部30gと第8電極部30hの間、左腕に対応する第9電極部30iと第10電極部30jの間の抵抗値を検出する。下半身用制御ユニット126の通電検知部52は、右前腿に対応する第11電極部30kと第12電極部30lの間、左前腿に対応する第13電極部30mと第14電極部30nの間、右腿裏に対応する第15電極部30oと第16電極部30pの間、左腿裏に対応する第17電極部30qと第18電極部30rの間、右臀部に対応する第19電極部30sと第20電極部30tの間、左臀部に対応する第21電極部30uと第22電極部30vの間の抵抗値を検出する。通電検知部52は、検出した抵抗値が閾値未満の場合は通電可能として検知し、検出した抵抗値が閾値以上の場合は通電不可として検知する。
The power supply control unit 50 controls the charging of the power supply unit 22 and transmits information indicating the charging state to the user terminal 12 via the wireless communication unit 58. The energization detection unit 52 detects the resistance value between the electrodes of the anode and the cathode in order to detect whether or not energization is possible between the electrodes. For example, the energization detection unit 52 of the upper body control unit 124 is located between the first electrode portion 30a and the second electrode portion 30b corresponding to the abdominal muscle, and between the third electrode portion 30c and the fourth electrode portion 30d corresponding to the right flank. Between the 5th electrode part 30e and the 6th electrode part 30f corresponding to the left flank, between the 7th electrode part 30g and the 8th electrode part 30h corresponding to the right arm, and the 9th electrode part 30i and the 10th electrode corresponding to the left arm. The resistance value between the parts 30j is detected. The energization detection unit 52 of the lower body control unit 126 is located between the 11th electrode portion 30k and the 12th electrode portion 30l corresponding to the right front thigh, and between the 13th electrode portion 30m and the 14th electrode portion 30n corresponding to the left front thigh. Between the 15th electrode portion 30o and the 16th electrode portion 30p corresponding to the back of the right thigh, between the 17th electrode portion 30q and the 18th electrode portion 30r corresponding to the back of the left thigh, and the 19th electrode portion 30s corresponding to the right hip portion. The resistance value between the 21st electrode portion 30u and the 22nd electrode portion 30v corresponding to the left hip portion is detected between the 20th electrode portion 30t and the 20th electrode portion 30t. The energization detection unit 52 detects that energization is possible when the detected resistance value is less than the threshold value, and detects that energization is not possible when the detected resistance value is equal to or more than the threshold value.
電気刺激制御部54は、通電検知部52によって通電可能として検知されると、トレーニングプログラム2等で定められた所定の動作時間、所定の周期で、陽極と陰極の電極間に設定電圧を印加する。すなわち、各電極が配置された箇所、例えばユーザの腹筋、脇腹、腕部、脚部、臀部等に電気刺激を与える。設定部56は、所定のトレーニングプログラムやEMSモードに沿って電気刺激制御部54により制御される電圧値およびその増減を設定する。設定電圧値は、例えば20段階の強度としていずれかの値が設定できる。設定部56には、中央サーバ等から提供されるトレーニングプログラム2の他、単独で実行するトレーニングプログラムやEMSモードも内蔵されており、無線通信を介して接続されたリモート制御ユニット(例えば、携帯電話などの情報端末と、その端末にインストールされた制御アプリケーション)を操作することで、そのトレーニングプログラムやEMSモードの実行を開始することもできる。
When the electrical stimulation control unit 54 is detected by the energization detection unit 52 as being energizable, the electrical stimulation control unit 54 applies a set voltage between the electrodes of the anode and the cathode at a predetermined operation time and a predetermined cycle defined by the training program 2 or the like. .. That is, electrical stimulation is applied to a place where each electrode is arranged, for example, the user's abdomen, flank, arm, leg, buttocks and the like. The setting unit 56 sets the voltage value controlled by the electrical stimulation control unit 54 and its increase / decrease according to a predetermined training program or EMS mode. As the set voltage value, any value can be set, for example, as the intensity in 20 steps. In addition to the training program 2 provided by the central server or the like, the setting unit 56 also has a built-in training program to be executed independently and an EMS mode, and is a remote control unit connected via wireless communication (for example, a mobile phone). By operating the information terminal such as, and the control application installed on the terminal, the training program or the execution of the EMS mode can be started.
無線通信部58は、近距離無線通信を介してユーザ端末12から設定電圧等の情報を受信して設定部56に送る。設定部56は、無線通信部58がユーザ端末12から設定電圧値の情報、あるいは、設定電圧値の増加や減少を指示する情報を受信した場合は、受信した情報に基づいて印加する設定電圧値を増減させる。例えば運動開始前の電圧値設定作業においては、設定電圧値の増減がなされるたびに、電気刺激制御部54は新たな設定電圧値にて電極間に電圧を印加することで、新たな設定電圧値、すなわち運動強度をユーザに体感させ、確認させる。無線通信部58は、運動中、すなわち電圧印加中も運動強度の増減指示をユーザ端末12から受信した場合は増減された設定電圧の情報を設定部56に送り、設定部56は設定電圧値を増減する。ただし、接続中のユーザ端末12以外から運動強度の増減指示を受信しても無視し、他の装置からの運動強度の増減指示にはしたがわない。ユーザ以外の他者によって勝手に電圧値を増減されてしまうことを防止するためである。無線通信部58は、電気刺激制御部54による電圧印加状態、すなわち運動実行状態を示す情報をユーザ端末12へ送信してもよい。なお、制御ユニット128にはペアリングボタンを設けてもよく、そのペアリングボタンがオンされたときに無線通信部58が無線通信の接続を確立してもよい。変形例として、無線通信部58は、他の制御ユニットに含まれる無線通信部58と近距離無線通信を介してペアリングによる接続をしてもよい。すなわち、上半身用制御ユニット124の無線通信部58と下半身用制御ユニット126の無線通信部58とが無線接続し、一方が他方に設定電圧値等の情報を転送することで連動してもよい。この場合、例えば上半身用制御ユニット124の設定部56に電圧値が設定されれば、上半身用制御ユニット124の無線通信部58から下半身用制御ユニット126の無線通信部58に設定電圧値が転送される。
The wireless communication unit 58 receives information such as a set voltage from the user terminal 12 via short-range wireless communication and sends it to the setting unit 56. When the wireless communication unit 58 receives information on the set voltage value or information instructing an increase or decrease in the set voltage value from the user terminal 12, the setting unit 56 applies the set voltage value based on the received information. Increase or decrease. For example, in the voltage value setting work before the start of exercise, each time the set voltage value is increased or decreased, the electrical stimulation control unit 54 applies a voltage between the electrodes at a new set voltage value to obtain a new set voltage. Let the user experience and confirm the value, that is, the exercise intensity. When the wireless communication unit 58 receives an instruction to increase / decrease the exercise intensity from the user terminal 12 during exercise, that is, even while the voltage is applied, the wireless communication unit 58 sends information on the increased / decreased set voltage to the setting unit 56, and the setting unit 56 sends the set voltage value. Increase or decrease. However, even if an exercise intensity increase / decrease instruction is received from a user terminal other than the connected user terminal 12, it is ignored and does not follow the exercise intensity increase / decrease instruction from another device. This is to prevent the voltage value from being arbitrarily increased or decreased by someone other than the user. The wireless communication unit 58 may transmit information indicating a voltage application state by the electrical stimulation control unit 54, that is, an exercise execution state, to the user terminal 12. The control unit 128 may be provided with a pairing button, and the wireless communication unit 58 may establish a wireless communication connection when the pairing button is turned on. As a modification, the wireless communication unit 58 may be connected to the wireless communication unit 58 included in another control unit by pairing via short-range wireless communication. That is, the wireless communication unit 58 of the upper body control unit 124 and the wireless communication unit 58 of the lower body control unit 126 may be wirelessly connected, and one may be linked by transferring information such as a set voltage value to the other. In this case, for example, if a voltage value is set in the setting unit 56 of the upper body control unit 124, the set voltage value is transferred from the wireless communication unit 58 of the upper body control unit 124 to the wireless communication unit 58 of the lower body control unit 126. To.
以上、図3~6を参照してEMS装置102について説明した。続いて、EMS装置102と同時にトレーニングに用いられるバイク103について説明する。
The EMS device 102 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6. Subsequently, the bike 103 used for training at the same time as the EMS device 102 will be described.
図7は、バイク103の一つの構成例を示す。本図に示されるバイク103Aは、ユーザが腰掛けるサドル1031と、ユーザが把持するハンドル1032と、ユーザが足で漕ぐペダル1033と、ペダル1033に合わせて回転駆動される車輪1034と、車輪1034よりも径が大きい略円形状で、車輪1034が略内接するような態様で配置される発光部1035と、発光部1035を取り囲むような形状で、上記の各部材を連結支持するフレーム1036を備える。
FIG. 7 shows one configuration example of the motorcycle 103. The bike 103A shown in this figure is more than a saddle 1031 on which the user sits, a handle 1032 held by the user, a pedal 1033 that the user pedals, a wheel 1034 that is rotationally driven according to the pedal 1033, and a wheel 1034. It is provided with a light emitting portion 1035 having a substantially circular shape having a large diameter and arranged in such a manner that the wheels 1034 are substantially inscribed, and a frame 1036 having a shape surrounding the light emitting portion 1035 and connecting and supporting each of the above members.
バイク103Aでトレーニングを行うユーザは、EMS装置102を着用した状態でサドル1031に腰掛け、ハンドル1032を把持し、ペダル1033を漕ぐトレーニングを行う。ペダル1033の負荷は負荷調整レバー1037により調整可能であり、ユーザは所望の負荷を設定してトレーニングを行える。負荷調整レバー1037は、その位置に応じて8段階の負荷を設定するもので、サドル1031に近い位置ほど低負荷となり、ハンドル1032に近い位置ほど高負荷となる。なお、バイク103Aはユーザ端末12と有線または無線で通信可能に構成されており、ユーザ端末12にインストールされたアプリケーションソフトウェア等を通じて負荷調整を行う構成としてもよい。また、トレーニング中のペダル1033の回転は図示しないセンサにより常時測定され、バイク103A自身またはバイク103Aと通信可能なユーザ端末12がトレーニングのパフォーマンスを示す様々なデータ(回転数、スピード、走行距離、アウトプット、消費カロリー)を演算するのに利用される。これらのパフォーマンスデータは、負荷の段階データと合わせて機器情報取得部108によって収集される。
The user who trains on the bike 103A sits on the saddle 1031 while wearing the EMS device 102, grips the handle 1032, and trains to pedal the pedal 1033. The load of the pedal 1033 can be adjusted by the load adjusting lever 1037, and the user can set a desired load for training. The load adjusting lever 1037 sets a load in eight stages according to its position, and the position closer to the saddle 1031 has a lower load, and the position closer to the handle 1032 has a higher load. The bike 103A is configured to be able to communicate with the user terminal 12 by wire or wirelessly, and may be configured to adjust the load through application software or the like installed on the user terminal 12. In addition, the rotation of the pedal 1033 during training is constantly measured by a sensor (not shown), and various data (rotation speed, speed, mileage, output) indicating the training performance of the bike 103A itself or the user terminal 12 capable of communicating with the bike 103A are shown. It is used to calculate the calories burned. These performance data are collected by the device information acquisition unit 108 together with the load stage data.
センサによって測定されるペダル1033の回転がユーザの運動量を正確に表すようにするため、車輪1034はいわゆるフリーホイール構造のものを採用するのが好ましい。フリーホイール構造の車輪1034では、ユーザがペダル1033を漕ぐのを停止すると、車輪1034は惰性で回転し続けるが、ペダル1033の回転は即時に止まる。比較例として、いわゆる負荷直結構造の車輪では、ユーザがペダル1033を漕ぐのを停止しても、車輪1034だけでなくペダル1033自身も惰性で回転し続けてしまう。このように、フリーホイール構造を採用することで、ペダル1033の回転がユーザの運動量を正確に表すようになるため、離れた場所にいるインストラクター、ユーザの間で正確なデータ共有が可能となる。後述するように、このデータに基づいてユーザのランキングが作成されるため、その公正性も担保できる。
It is preferable to adopt a wheel 1034 having a so-called freewheel structure so that the rotation of the pedal 1033 measured by the sensor accurately represents the amount of movement of the user. In the wheel 1034 of the freewheel structure, when the user stops pedaling the pedal 1033, the wheel 1034 continues to rotate by coasting, but the rotation of the pedal 1033 stops immediately. As a comparative example, in a wheel having a so-called load direct connection structure, even if the user stops pedaling the pedal 1033, not only the wheel 1034 but also the pedal 1033 itself continues to rotate by inertia. As described above, by adopting the freewheel structure, the rotation of the pedal 1033 accurately represents the momentum of the user, so that accurate data sharing between the instructor and the user at a distant place becomes possible. As will be described later, since the user ranking is created based on this data, its fairness can be guaranteed.
発光部1035は、その略円周に沿って連続的に配置される多数のLED等の発光素子で構成され、ペダル1033の回転状態に応じて異なる態様で略円形状に発光する。例えば、ペダル1033の回転速度が大きくなるほど強く発光させる、回転速度に応じて発光色を変化させる、回転速度に応じて発光パターンを変化させる(点滅速度を変える、略円周に沿って発光部分が動いて見えるスピードを変化させる等)等が考えられる。
The light emitting unit 1035 is composed of a large number of light emitting elements such as LEDs arranged continuously along its substantially circumference, and emits light in a substantially circular shape in different modes depending on the rotational state of the pedal 1033. For example, the higher the rotation speed of the pedal 1033, the stronger the light emission, the light emission color is changed according to the rotation speed, and the light emission pattern is changed according to the rotation speed (the blinking speed is changed, the light emitting portion is approximately along the circumference. (Change the speed at which it appears to move, etc.), etc. are conceivable.
このような発光部1035を備えるバイク103Aは、特にフィットネスジム80に設置するのが好適である。図8は、フィットネスジム80で複数のユーザがバイク103Aでトレーニングする様子を示す。ユーザの前方のステージではトレーニング指導を行うインストラクターが同じくバイク103Aに乗っている。ステージ前のトレーニングエリアには、複数のバイク103Aが整然と配置され、各ユーザが割り当てられたバイク103Aに乗ってトレーニングを行う。トレーニング中の演出として照明は暗めに設定されているため、各ユーザのバイク103Aの発光部1035が回転速度に応じて異なる態様で発光する様子が容易に見て取れる。インストラクターは、その発光状態から各ユーザの状況を即座に把握し、必要な指導や叱咤激励を適時に行える。また、遠隔の個人スペース81からトレーニングに参加するユーザは、カメラ109で撮影されたフィットネスジム80の映像を表示画面13で確認できる。このとき、インストラクターの場合と同様に、遠隔ユーザは、各バイク103Aの発光部1035の発光状態から、フィットネスジム80にいる他のユーザの回転速度を視覚的に把握でき、そこから刺激を受けて高いモチベーションや競争意識を持ってトレーニングを継続できる。
The bike 103A provided with such a light emitting unit 1035 is particularly suitable to be installed in the fitness gym 80. FIG. 8 shows how a plurality of users train on the bike 103A at the fitness gym 80. On the stage in front of the user, an instructor who provides training guidance is also riding the bike 103A. A plurality of bikes 103A are arranged in an orderly manner in the training area in front of the stage, and each user trains on the assigned bike 103A. Since the lighting is set to be dark as an effect during training, it is easy to see how the light emitting unit 1035 of each user's motorcycle 103A emits light in different modes according to the rotation speed. The instructor can immediately grasp the situation of each user from the light emitting state, and can give necessary guidance and scolding encouragement in a timely manner. Further, the user who participates in the training from the remote personal space 81 can confirm the image of the fitness gym 80 taken by the camera 109 on the display screen 13. At this time, as in the case of the instructor, the remote user can visually grasp the rotation speed of other users in the fitness gym 80 from the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 1035 of each bike 103A, and is stimulated from there. You can continue training with high motivation and competitiveness.
図9は、バイク103の他の構成例を示す。本図に示されるバイク103Bは、図7に示されるバイク103Aとデザインは異なるが、基本的には同等の構成と機能を持つものであり、その説明を省略する。ただし、バイク103Aに設けられていた発光部1035は、バイク103Bには設けられない。上記のようにフィットネスジム80では、発光部1035のあるバイク103Aを設置するのが好ましいが、家庭等の個人スペース81向けにはデザイン性に優れたバイク103Aと、より安価なバイク103Bの間で適宜選択可能である。
FIG. 9 shows another configuration example of the bike 103. The bike 103B shown in this figure has a different design from the bike 103A shown in FIG. 7, but basically has the same configuration and function, and the description thereof will be omitted. However, the light emitting unit 1035 provided on the motorcycle 103A is not provided on the motorcycle 103B. As described above, in the fitness gym 80, it is preferable to install a bike 103A having a light emitting unit 1035, but for a personal space 81 such as a home, between the bike 103A having excellent design and the cheaper bike 103B. It can be selected as appropriate.
以上、図7~9を参照してバイク103について説明した。上記でも言及したように、本実施形態では、着用したEMS装置102から電気刺激を受けながら、バイク103等によるトレーニングを行うことで、前者による不随意運動と、後者による随意運動を組み合わせたハイブリッドトレーニングを行うことができる。図10と図11は、このようなハイブリッドトレーニングの優れた効果を示す。
The bike 103 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. As mentioned above, in the present embodiment, by performing training with a motorcycle 103 or the like while receiving electrical stimulation from the worn EMS device 102, hybrid training that combines involuntary movements by the former and voluntary movements by the latter is performed. It can be performed. 10 and 11 show the excellent effect of such hybrid training.
図10は、左側のグラフでそれぞれの身体活動強度が示される随意運動(Vol)、電気刺激による不随意運動(EMS)、両者の組合せによるハイブリッドトレーニング(Vol + EMS)について、右側のグラフで運動前後の血中乳酸値の変化を示すものである。左側のグラフの身体活動強度の単位であるMetsは、安静時を1として、その倍率で身体活動の強さを示すもので、例えば普通歩行は3 Mets程度である。不随意運動は身体を自ら動かさないため身体活動強度が低い(1.0 Mets強)。また、本実験における随意運動としては低強度の筋力トレーニングを採用した(3.0 Mets程度)。ハイブリッドトレーニングでは、随意運動と同じ筋力トレーニングを行う際に電気刺激を付与した。身体活動強度は若干上がるものの(3.7 Mets程度)、運動としては低強度のままである(比較例として、ゆっくりとしたジョギングは6 Mets程度である)。なお、不随意運動およびハイブリッドトレーニングの際に付与する電気刺激の周波数は、筋力トレーニングに適した20Hzを主として用いた。右側の血中乳酸値のグラフを見ると、いずれの運動でも運動後に血中乳酸値の上昇が見られるが、ハイブリッドトレーニングが突出している。特に、随意運動とハイブリッドトレーニングを比較すると、左側のグラフの身体活動強度の差が僅かであるにも関わらず、右側のグラフの血中乳酸値の上昇量に顕著な差が現れている。このように、随意運動と不随意運動を組み合わせたハイブリッドトレーニングは、随意運動のみと比較して優れたトレーニング効果を有することが分かる。
FIG. 10 shows the voluntary movement (Vol) in which the intensity of each physical activity is shown in the graph on the left side, the involuntary movement (EMS) by electrical stimulation, and the hybrid training (Vol + EMS) by the combination of both. It shows the change in blood lactate level before and after. Mets, which is a unit of physical activity intensity in the graph on the left, shows the intensity of physical activity at a magnification of 1 at rest. For example, normal walking is about 3 Mets. Involuntary movements do not move the body by themselves, so the physical activity intensity is low (1.0 Mets strength). In addition, low-intensity strength training was adopted as a voluntary exercise in this experiment (about 3.0 Mets). In the hybrid training, electrical stimulation was applied when performing the same strength training as the voluntary movement. Although the physical activity intensity increases slightly (about 3.7 Mets), it remains low as an exercise (as a comparative example, slow jogging is about 6 Mets). The frequency of the electrical stimulation applied during involuntary movements and hybrid training was mainly 20 Hz, which is suitable for strength training. Looking at the graph of blood lactate level on the right side, an increase in blood lactate level can be seen after exercise in any exercise, but hybrid training is prominent. In particular, when comparing voluntary exercise and hybrid training, although the difference in physical activity intensity in the graph on the left is slight, there is a marked difference in the amount of increase in blood lactate level in the graph on the right. As described above, it can be seen that the hybrid training that combines the voluntary movement and the involuntary movement has an excellent training effect as compared with the voluntary movement alone.
図11は、随意運動のみ(VOL)とハイブリッドトレーニング(VOL + EMS)について、運動強度を変化させたときの酸素消費量の変化と血中乳酸値の変化を示す。本実験での随意運動としては、バイク103による有酸素運動を採用した。酸素消費量および血中乳酸値の両グラフにおいて、運動強度の大小によらず、ハイブリッドトレーニングが随意運動を上回っている。したがって、この実験からも、ハイブリッドトレーニングが随意運動(のみ)と比較して優れたトレーニング効果を有することが分かる。
FIG. 11 shows changes in oxygen consumption and changes in blood lactate levels when exercise intensity is changed for voluntary exercise only (VOL) and hybrid training (VOL + EMS). As a voluntary exercise in this experiment, aerobic exercise by bike 103 was adopted. In both the oxygen consumption and blood lactate levels, hybrid training exceeds voluntary exercise regardless of the magnitude of exercise intensity. Therefore, it can be seen from this experiment that the hybrid training has an excellent training effect as compared with the voluntary movement (only).
このようにハイブリッドトレーニングが優れたトレーニング効果を発揮するのは、遅筋と速筋を同時にバランス良く鍛えられるためと考えられる。遅筋は、ウォーキングやバイクトレーニング等の有酸素運動や低強度の筋力トレーニング等の軽めの随意運動で比較的容易に鍛えられるが、速筋を随意運動で鍛えるには、短距離走等の無酸素運動や高強度の筋力トレーニング等を行う必要がある。このように、一般のユーザにとっては速筋を鍛えるハードルが高く、遅筋のみのトレーニングに終始してしまう傾向がある。一方で、EMS装置102による電気刺激は、低強度の随意運動で鍛えることが困難な速筋も容易に鍛えられる。例えば、電気刺激の周波数として20Hzを使えば、速筋に不完全強縮を促して持続的な負荷をかけることができる。以上のような認識の下、本実施形態では、バイク103を用いた有酸素運動の際にユーザにEMS装置102の着用を促し、効果的なハイブリッドトレーニングを実現する。また、バイク103を使用しないトレーニング、例えば、インストラクターの指導による筋力トレーニングやストレッチ、ヨガ等の軽度の随意運動の際にもEMS装置102の着用を促すことで、ハイブリッドトレーニングの効果が得られる。
It is thought that the reason why hybrid training exerts an excellent training effect in this way is that slow muscles and fast muscles can be trained in a well-balanced manner at the same time. Slow muscles can be trained relatively easily with aerobic exercises such as walking and bike training, and light voluntary exercises such as low-intensity strength training, but to train fast muscles with voluntary exercises, short-distance running, etc. It is necessary to perform anaerobic exercise and high-intensity strength training. In this way, general users have a high hurdle to train fast muscles, and tend to end up training only slow muscles. On the other hand, the electrical stimulation by the EMS device 102 easily trains fast muscles that are difficult to train with low-intensity voluntary movements. For example, if 20 Hz is used as the frequency of electrical stimulation, incomplete tetanus can be promoted in the fast muscles and a continuous load can be applied. Based on the above recognition, in the present embodiment, the user is encouraged to wear the EMS device 102 during aerobic exercise using the bike 103, and effective hybrid training is realized. Further, the effect of hybrid training can be obtained by encouraging the wearing of the EMS device 102 even during training that does not use the bike 103, for example, strength training under the guidance of an instructor, stretching, or light voluntary exercise such as yoga.
以上、運動制御システム100の構成、特にユーザがトレーニング時に使用するトレーニング機器であるEMS装置102とバイク103の構成について詳述した。また、これらの構成に基づきユーザが実施可能なハイブリッドトレーニングの優れた効果も説明した。続いて、運動制御システム100でトレーニングプログラム2を実行する際の具体的な処理について、ユーザ端末12a、12b、12c(以下、ユーザ端末12と総称することがある)、インストラクター端末12d、ディレクター端末12eのそれぞれの画面例を示しながら説明する。
The configuration of the motion control system 100, particularly the configuration of the EMS device 102 and the bike 103, which are training devices used by the user during training, has been described in detail above. He also explained the excellent effects of hybrid training that can be performed by the user based on these configurations. Subsequently, regarding specific processing when the training program 2 is executed by the exercise control system 100, the user terminals 12a, 12b, 12c (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as the user terminal 12), the instructor terminal 12d, and the director terminal 12e. This will be explained by showing an example of each screen of.
図12は、トレーニング開始前に、ユーザ、インストラクター、ディレクターそれぞれに向けて表示させるトレーニング説明画面の例を示す。図12(A)はユーザ端末12に表示されるトレーニング説明画面であり、図12(B)はインストラクター端末12dに表示されるトレーニング説明画面であり、図12(C)はディレクター端末12eに表示されるトレーニング説明画面である。画面内容はほとんど共通のため、図12(A)のユーザ画面について詳細に説明し、図12(B)のインストラクター画面と図12(C)のディレクター画面は差異がある場合に言及するに留める。
FIG. 12 shows an example of a training explanation screen displayed to each of the user, the instructor, and the director before the start of training. 12 (A) is a training explanation screen displayed on the user terminal 12, FIG. 12 (B) is a training explanation screen displayed on the instructor terminal 12d, and FIG. 12 (C) is displayed on the director terminal 12e. This is the training explanation screen. Since the screen contents are almost the same, the user screen of FIG. 12 (A) will be described in detail, and only when there is a difference between the instructor screen of FIG. 12 (B) and the director screen of FIG. 12 (C) will be mentioned.
図12(A)の上部から下部に向かって、トレーニング開始時刻(START: 19:00)、トレーニング種別(バイク | レース)、トレーニング名(100 km バイクレースチャレンジ vol.02)、インストラクターのアイコンと氏名、トレーニング詳細、EMSモード、準備開始ボタン等が表示される。トレーニング開始時刻は、トレーニングのライブ配信や、開始時刻の指定されたアーカイブ配信の場合に表示される。ユーザが好きな時間に視聴可能なVOD配信の場合は表示されない。トレーニング種別は、バイク103を用いたものや、バイク103を用いない筋力トレーニング、ストレッチ、ヨガ等の種別を示す。EMSモードは、トレーニングの各セットの電気刺激のモードを表示する。図示のトレーニングは、三つのセットに分かれている。Set 1では、20 Hzの周波数が中心のTRADモードと20 Hzと4 Hzの周波数を適宜織り交ぜたSPOTモードのいずれかをユーザが選択できる。Set 2とSet 3では、20 Hzの周波数が中心のTRADモードが予め指定されている。以上の情報を確認した後、ユーザが準備開始ボタンを画面上で押下すると次の画面に遷移する。
From the top to the bottom of Fig. 12 (A), the training start time (START: 19:00), training type (bike | race), training name (100km bike race challenge vol.02), instructor icon and name. , Training details, EMS mode, preparation start button, etc. are displayed. The training start time is displayed for live training delivery or archive delivery with a specified start time. It is not displayed in the case of VOD distribution that can be viewed by the user at a desired time. The training type indicates a type using the bike 103, strength training without using the bike 103, stretching, yoga, and the like. The EMS mode displays the mode of electrical stimulation for each set of training. The training shown is divided into three sets. In Set 1, the user can select either the TRAD mode centered on the frequency of 20 Hz or the SPOT mode in which the frequencies of 20 Hz and 4 Hz are appropriately interwoven. In Set 2 and Set 3, the TRAD mode centered on the frequency of 20 Hz is specified in advance. After confirming the above information, when the user presses the preparation start button on the screen, the next screen is displayed.
図12(B)のインストラクター画面の右上角にはログアウトボタンが設けられている。これは複数のインストラクターやディレクターで同一の端末を共有することがあるため、端末の使用者を適宜切り替えられるようにするためである。また、トレーニング詳細の情報は図12(A)のユーザ画面と同一であるが、その内容を修正したい場合は、別途登録されているマスタ情報を修正すればよい。
A logout button is provided in the upper right corner of the instructor screen in Fig. 12 (B). This is because the same terminal may be shared by multiple instructors and directors, so that the user of the terminal can be switched as appropriate. Further, the training details information is the same as the user screen of FIG. 12A, but if it is desired to modify the content, the separately registered master information may be modified.
図12(C)のディレクター画面では、図12(A)および(B)のトレーニング詳細の代わりに配信設定の情報が表示される。ライブ配信の有無に応じて「あり」と「なし」が表示され、後日の配信のためのVOD録画の有無に応じて「あり」と「なし」が表示される。この配信設定の情報は、トレーニングプログラム2の作成時にプログラム作成スタッフ、インストラクター、ディレクター等の担当者が入力し、トレーニング開始前に必要に応じて変更可能である。トレーニング開始に当たり、ディレクターが画面下部の準備開始ボタンを押下すると、フィットネスジム80および個人スペース81のユーザの受け入れを開始する。
On the director screen of FIG. 12 (C), information on distribution settings is displayed instead of the training details of FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B). "Yes" and "None" are displayed depending on the presence or absence of live distribution, and "Yes" and "None" are displayed depending on the presence or absence of VOD recording for distribution at a later date. This distribution setting information is input by a person in charge such as a program creation staff, an instructor, or a director when the training program 2 is created, and can be changed as necessary before the start of training. When the director presses the preparation start button at the bottom of the screen at the start of training, the acceptance of users of the fitness gym 80 and the personal space 81 is started.
図13~図15は、図12(A)のユーザ画面で準備開始ボタンが押下された後にユーザ端末12が遷移する画面を示す。これらの画面は、トレーニングを開始するに当たり、ユーザが着用するEMS装置102の設定を行うものである。
13 to 15 show a screen in which the user terminal 12 transitions after the preparation start button is pressed on the user screen of FIG. 12 (A). These screens set the EMS device 102 to be worn by the user at the start of training.
図13(A)は、Topコントローラーと表記される上半身用制御ユニット124と、Bottomコントローラーと表記される下半身用制御ユニット126の連携設定(シンクロ設定)を行う画面である。画面上の指示にあるように、各ユニットにあるシンクロボタン1241、1261を同時に長押しすることで両ユニットが連携する。
FIG. 13A is a screen for setting the cooperation (synchronization setting) between the upper body control unit 124, which is described as the Top controller, and the lower body control unit 126, which is described as the Bottom controller. As instructed on the screen, both units are linked by pressing and holding the sync buttons 1241 and 1261 on each unit at the same time.
図13(B)は、図13(A)で連携した上半身用制御ユニット124と、下半身用制御ユニット126を、ユーザ端末12にインストールされたアプリケーションソフトウェアとペアリングする画面である。画面下部のペアリング開始ボタンを押下すると、Bluetooth(登録商標)等の近距離無線通信を介したペアリングが実行される。ペアリングが完了すると図13(C)のようなペアリング完了画面が表示される。
FIG. 13B is a screen for pairing the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 linked in FIG. 13A with the application software installed on the user terminal 12. When the pairing start button at the bottom of the screen is pressed, pairing is executed via short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth (registered trademark). When the pairing is completed, the pairing completion screen as shown in FIG. 13C is displayed.
図14(A)は、上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122に、それぞれ上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126を装着する指示画面である。本図でコントローラーと総称される上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126を、画面で位置が指示される第1制御ユニット接続部20aと第2制御ユニット接続部20bにそれぞれ装着することで電気的に接続し、上半身用制御ユニット124と下半身用制御ユニット126の制御による電気刺激の付与が可能な状態とする。
FIG. 14A is an instruction screen for attaching the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 to the upper body garment unit 120 and the lower body garment unit 122, respectively. By attaching the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126, which are collectively referred to as controllers in this figure, to the first control unit connection unit 20a and the second control unit connection unit 20b whose positions are indicated on the screen, electricity is obtained. It is possible to apply electrical stimulation by controlling the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126.
図14(B)および(C)は、EMSモード、すなわちトレーニング中の電気刺激で主に使用する周波数を示す画面である。図14(B)の画面例では、トレーニングの各セットのEMSモードを、用意された複数の選択肢の中からユーザが選択可能になっている。図14(C)の画面例では、トレーニング中の各セットのEMSモードが予め指定されており、その情報が表示されている。
14 (B) and 14 (C) are screens showing the EMS mode, that is, the frequency mainly used for electrical stimulation during training. In the screen example of FIG. 14B, the user can select the EMS mode of each set of training from the plurality of prepared options. In the screen example of FIG. 14C, the EMS mode of each set during training is specified in advance, and the information is displayed.
図15(A)は、EMSレベル、すなわちトレーニング中の電気刺激の強度の設定画面である。EMSレベルは20段階の中から選択でき、上半身用衣服部120と下半身用衣服部122で個別に設定可能である。なお、後述するように、EMSレベルはトレーニング中の画面から変更することもできる。
FIG. 15A is a screen for setting the EMS level, that is, the intensity of electrical stimulation during training. The EMS level can be selected from 20 levels, and can be individually set for the upper body garment section 120 and the lower body garment section 122. As will be described later, the EMS level can be changed from the screen during training.
以上のEMS装置102の設定が完了すると、図15(B)のトレーニング準備完了画面に遷移し、これから開始されるトレーニングプログラムの概要と、EMS装置102の設定情報(EMSレベルおよびEMSモード)が簡易的に表示される。また、上半身用衣服部120に装着された上半身用制御ユニット124と、下半身用衣服部122に装着された下半身用制御ユニット126のそれぞれのバッテリー残量も表示され、トレーニング中にバッテリー残量がゼロにならないようユーザに注意を促す。以上の情報を確認したユーザが画面下部のトレーニングスタートボタンを押下すると、トレーニング開始時刻まで待機する待機画面に遷移する。
When the above setting of the EMS device 102 is completed, the screen transitions to the training preparation completion screen of FIG. 15B, and the outline of the training program to be started and the setting information (EMS level and EMS mode) of the EMS device 102 are simplified. Is displayed. In addition, the remaining battery levels of the upper body control unit 124 mounted on the upper body garment 120 and the lower body control unit 126 mounted on the lower body garment 122 are also displayed, and the battery level is zero during training. Attention to the user not to become. When the user who confirms the above information presses the training start button at the bottom of the screen, the screen transitions to the standby screen that waits until the training start time.
図16は、ディレクター端末12eで、トレーニング全体と、トレーニングの各セットを開始する画面を示す。図16(A)は、トレーニング全体を開始する画面である。画面中央の「ライブ配信・録画開始」のボタンをディレクターが押下すると、トレーニングが開始し、そのライブ配信と録画も開始する。画面中央のボタンの表示は、図12(C)の配信設定の情報に対応しており、図示の例はライブ配信、VOD録画ともに「あり」の場合に対応する。他の例として、ライブ配信「なし」VOD録画「あり」の場合は「録画開始」と表示され、ライブ配信「あり」VOD録画「なし」の場合は「ライブ配信開始」と表示され、ライブ配信「なし」VOD録画「なし」の場合は、本画面をスキップして次の図16(B)の画面に遷移する。本図のその他の要素については後述する。
FIG. 16 shows the entire training and the screen for starting each set of training on the director terminal 12e. FIG. 16A is a screen for starting the entire training. When the director presses the "Live distribution / recording start" button in the center of the screen, training starts, and the live distribution and recording also start. The display of the button in the center of the screen corresponds to the information of the distribution setting in FIG. 12C, and the illustrated example corresponds to the case where both live distribution and VOD recording are “Yes”. As another example, if the live distribution is "none" and the VOD recording is "yes", "recording start" is displayed, and if the live distribution is "yes" and the VOD recording is "none", "live distribution start" is displayed and the live distribution is performed. "None" In the case of VOD recording "None", this screen is skipped and the screen transitions to the next screen of FIG. 16 (B). Other elements of this figure will be described later.
図16(B)は、図16(A)でトレーニング全体を開始した後、そのトレーニング中の各セットをディレクターが開始する画面である。画面中央には図16(A)のボタン表示に対応して「ライブ配信中」および「VOD録画中」と表示され、その下に開始対象のセットであるSet 1について「SET 1トレーニング準備中・・・」との状況が表示され、さらにその下に当該セットを開始するための「SET 1トレーニング開始」ボタンが設けられる。このボタンをディレクターが押下すると、セットが開始し、トレーニングプログラム2およびプログラム制御部3に基づくEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データのユーザへの提供が開始する。このように、ライブ配信時のEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データの提供はインストラクターとは異なるディレクターの操作に基づき開始される。一方、ライブ配信ではないVOD配信の場合は、ディレクターではなくユーザの端末操作に応じて、ユーザの好きなタイミングでトレーニング全体または各セットを開始できる。なお、画面右側にはトレーニングに参加中のユーザのリストが表示されるが、その詳細については後述する。
FIG. 16 (B) is a screen in which the director starts each set during the training after starting the entire training in FIG. 16 (A). In the center of the screen, "Live distribution" and "VOD recording" are displayed corresponding to the button display in Fig. 16 (A), and below that, "SET 1 training is being prepared for Set 1", which is the set to be started.・ ・ ”Is displayed, and a“ SET 1 training start ”button is provided below it to start the set. When the director presses this button, the set starts, and the provision of the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the training program 2 and the program control unit 3 to the user starts. In this way, the provision of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data at the time of live distribution is started based on the operation of a director different from the instructor. On the other hand, in the case of VOD distribution other than live distribution, the entire training or each set can be started at the user's favorite timing according to the terminal operation of the user instead of the director. A list of users participating in the training is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the details will be described later.
図17および図18は、トレーニング中に、ユーザ、インストラクター、ディレクターそれぞれに向けて表示させるトレーニング画面の例を示す。図17は、バイク103を使用せずEMS装置102のみを使った自らの体重を負荷とする自重トレーニングの画面例であり、図18は、バイク103とEMS装置102を使ったバイクトレーニングの画面例である。それぞれの図において、(A)はユーザ端末12に表示されるトレーニング画面であり、(B)はインストラクター端末12dに表示されるトレーニング画面であり、(C)はディレクター端末12eに表示されるトレーニング画面である。
17 and 18 show an example of a training screen displayed to each of the user, the instructor, and the director during training. FIG. 17 is a screen example of self-weight training using only the EMS device 102 without using the bike 103, and FIG. 18 is a screen example of the bike training using the bike 103 and the EMS device 102. Is. In each figure, (A) is a training screen displayed on the user terminal 12, (B) is a training screen displayed on the instructor terminal 12d, and (C) is a training screen displayed on the director terminal 12e. Is.
図17(A)は、自重トレーニング時のユーザ画面例である。画面中央にはトレーニングを実演指導するインストラクターのライブ映像831が表示される。また、インストラクターのライブ音声はユーザ端末12のスピーカ14から再生される。画面右下には、意思表示部を構成するレスポンスボタン832が設けられる。このレスポンスボタン832を押下することで、ユーザはインストラクターやディレクターに対して意思表示をすることができる。例えば、トレーニング中のインストラクターからの呼びかけ(コール)に応じた反応(レスポンス)をレスポンスボタン832で示すことで、ユーザのトレーニングへのエンゲージメントや熱中度の高さをインストラクターにライブで伝えることができる。変形例として、より複雑な意思表示をできるようにしてもよい。例えば、喜怒哀楽等の感情を表すアイコンを用意する、トレーニングに対する評価を示すアイコンを用意する、既定の定型メッセージを選択できるようにする、テキストや絵文字等でメッセージを入力できるようにする、等が考えられる。
FIG. 17A is an example of a user screen during self-weight training. In the center of the screen, a live video 831 of an instructor who demonstrates and teaches training is displayed. Further, the live voice of the instructor is reproduced from the speaker 14 of the user terminal 12. At the lower right of the screen, a response button 832 constituting an intention display unit is provided. By pressing the response button 832, the user can indicate his / her intention to the instructor or the director. For example, by showing the response (response) in response to the call from the instructor during training with the response button 832, it is possible to convey the user's engagement to training and the high degree of enthusiasm to the instructor live. As a modification, a more complicated expression of intention may be made possible. For example, prepare an icon that shows emotions such as emotions, prepare an icon that shows the evaluation of training, make it possible to select a default standard message, make it possible to enter a message with text or pictograms, etc. Can be considered.
画面左側には、ユーザが着用中のEMS装置102に関する情報が表示される。上から下に向かって、状態表示部833、EMSレベル調整対象選択部834、EMSレベル調整部835、一時停止ボタン836が表示される。状態表示部833は、上半身用制御ユニット124(Top)のバッテリー残量およびEMSレベル(LV. 8)、下半身用制御ユニット126(Bottom)のバッテリー残量およびEMSレベル(LV. 20)を示す。
Information about the EMS device 102 worn by the user is displayed on the left side of the screen. From top to bottom, the status display unit 833, the EMS level adjustment target selection unit 834, the EMS level adjustment unit 835, and the pause button 836 are displayed. The status display unit 833 shows the remaining battery level and EMS level (LV. 8) of the upper body control unit 124 (Top), and the remaining battery level and EMS level (LV. 20) of the lower body control unit 126 (Bottom).
EMSレベル調整対象選択部834は、EMSレベルを調整する対象を選択する。図示の例では「All」すなわち上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126の両方が選択されている。「Select」のボタンを押下することにより、上半身用制御ユニット124のみ、下半身用制御ユニット126のみ、も選択可能である。EMSレベル調整部835は、選択されたEMSレベル調整対象のEMSレベルの増減を行う。「All」が選択された図示の例で、レベル増ボタンである「+」ボタンを押下すると、上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126のEMSレベルが、それぞれ一段階増加する。図示の例では、TopがLV. 8からLV. 9に増加する(Bottomは上限のLV. 20のため、これ以上増加しない)。また、レベル減ボタンである「-」ボタンを押下すると、上半身用制御ユニット124および下半身用制御ユニット126のEMSレベルが、それぞれ一段階減少する。図示の例では、TopがLV. 8からLV. 7に減少し、BottomがLV. 20からLV. 19に減少する。EMSレベル調整対象がTopのみ、Bottomのみの場合は、それぞれのEMSレベルを一段階ずつ調整できる。
The EMS level adjustment target selection unit 834 selects the target for which the EMS level is to be adjusted. In the illustrated example, "All", that is, both the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are selected. By pressing the "Select" button, only the upper body control unit 124 and only the lower body control unit 126 can be selected. The EMS level adjustment unit 835 increases or decreases the EMS level of the selected EMS level adjustment target. In the illustrated example in which "All" is selected, when the "+" button, which is a level increase button, is pressed, the EMS level of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 is increased by one step, respectively. In the example shown, Top increases from LV.8 to LV.9 (Bottom is the upper limit of LV.20, so it does not increase any more). Further, when the "-" button, which is a level reduction button, is pressed, the EMS levels of the upper body control unit 124 and the lower body control unit 126 are each reduced by one step. In the illustrated example, Top decreases from LV.8 to LV.7 and Bottom decreases from LV.20 to LV.19. When the EMS level adjustment target is only Top and only Bottom, each EMS level can be adjusted one step at a time.
一時停止ボタン836は、EMS装置102の電気刺激を一時停止するボタンである。ユーザがトレーニング中に電気刺激が強すぎると感じたり、何らかの異常を感じたりした場合は、このボタンを押下することで即時に電気刺激を安全に停止できる。この一時停止ボタン836を、EMSレベル減ボタンである「-」ボタンの近く、すなわちEMSレベル増ボタンである「+」ボタンから遠くに配置することで、安全性が向上する。つまり、一時停止ボタン836を押下しようとするユーザが電気刺激の影響等で誤操作したとしても、離れた「+」ボタンが押下される可能性は低く、せいぜい隣接する「-」ボタンが押下されるに留まる。このとき、「-」ボタンの押下で電気刺激のレベルが下がるため、誤操作の可能性が下がり、安全に一時停止ボタン836を押下できるようになる。
The pause button 836 is a button for suspending the electrical stimulation of the EMS device 102. If the user feels that the electrical stimulation is too strong or something is wrong during training, the electrical stimulation can be stopped safely immediately by pressing this button. Safety is improved by arranging the pause button 836 near the "-" button which is the EMS level decrease button, that is, far from the "+" button which is the EMS level increase button. That is, even if the user who tries to press the pause button 836 makes an erroneous operation due to the influence of electrical stimulation, it is unlikely that the separated "+" button is pressed, and the adjacent "-" button is pressed at most. Stay in. At this time, since the level of electrical stimulation is lowered by pressing the "-" button, the possibility of erroneous operation is reduced, and the pause button 836 can be safely pressed.
画面上部には、トレーニングから退出するための退出ボタン837や、現在進行中のセット数(SET 1)、経過時間(04:55)およびそれを視覚的に示す時間バー、ライブ配信中であることを示すライブ表示(LIVE)、セットの総時間(10:00)等を示す状況表示部838が設けられる。
At the top of the screen, there is an exit button 837 to exit training, the number of sets currently in progress (SET 1), elapsed time (04:55) and a time bar that visually shows it, and live streaming is in progress. A live display (LIVE) indicating the above, a status display unit 838 indicating the total time of the set (10:00), and the like are provided.
図17(B)は、自重トレーニング時のインストラクター画面例である。画面右側には、トレーニングに参加中のユーザリスト839が、その参加総数(3,122)とともに表示される。各ユーザの情報を示す領域には、アイコン、名前やID、性別、年代、場所等の基本的な情報が表示される。また、本図ではSTUDIOと称されるフィットネスジム80から参加しているユーザには「STUDIO」の表示がなされる。同様に、体験レッスン中のユーザには「体験レッスン」の表示がなされる。変形例として、ユーザの着用しているEMS装置102に関する情報(例えば、図17(A)の状態表示部833に示されるようなTopおよびBottomのEMSレベル)、ユーザの状況に関する情報(例えば、図17(A)の一時停止ボタン836が押下されたか否か)、後述するようにEMS装置102やユーザ端末12の各種測定データに基づいて演算されるトレーニングのパフォーマンスデータ(例えば、身体活動強度、消費カロリー、図18で後述するような独自のパフォーマンススコア)、前述の意思表示部を介して送信されるユーザからの感情表示、評価、メッセージ等を追加的に表示してもよい。インストラクターは、以上のような情報からユーザの属性や状態を適時に把握でき、即時に各ユーザへの指導やコミュニケーションに活用できる。
FIG. 17B is an example of an instructor screen during self-weight training. On the right side of the screen, a list of 839 users participating in the training is displayed together with the total number of participants (3,122). In the area showing the information of each user, basic information such as an icon, a name or ID, a gender, an age, and a place is displayed. Further, in this figure, "STUDIO" is displayed to the users participating from the fitness gym 80 called STUDIO. Similarly, a "trial lesson" is displayed to the user during the trial lesson. As a modification, information about the EMS device 102 worn by the user (for example, EMS levels of Top and Bottom as shown in the state display unit 833 of FIG. 17A), information about the user's situation (for example, FIG. Whether or not the pause button 836 of 17 (A) is pressed), training performance data calculated based on various measurement data of the EMS device 102 and the user terminal 12 as described later (for example, physical activity intensity, consumption). Calories, a unique performance score as described later in FIG. 18), emotion display from the user transmitted via the above-mentioned intention display unit, evaluation, message, etc. may be additionally displayed. The instructor can grasp the attributes and status of the user in a timely manner from the above information, and can immediately utilize it for guidance and communication to each user.
画面左側には、ユーザリスト839に表示するユーザの条件を指定する条件指定部840が設けられる。トレーニングの参加ユーザ数が多い場合は、ユーザリスト839が長大となり、一画面に表示できないため、様々な条件で絞り込みや並び替えを可能とすることで、インストラクターの便宜を図る。本図の例では、ユーザの絞り込みを行うための各種条件が表示されており、インストラクターが所望の条件を押下することで、その条件に合致するユーザのみがユーザリスト839に表示される。変形例として、ユーザの並び替えを行うための各種条件を表示してもよい。例えば、参加順、年齢順、トレーニング回数順、パフォーマンススコア順、等が考えられる。
On the left side of the screen, a condition specification unit 840 for designating user conditions to be displayed in the user list 839 is provided. When the number of users participating in the training is large, the user list 839 becomes long and cannot be displayed on one screen. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down and sort under various conditions for the convenience of the instructor. In the example of this figure, various conditions for narrowing down the users are displayed, and when the instructor presses the desired conditions, only the users who meet the conditions are displayed in the user list 839. As a modification, various conditions for rearranging the users may be displayed. For example, the order of participation, the order of age, the order of the number of trainings, the order of performance scores, etc. can be considered.
条件指定部840とユーザリスト839の間の領域には、レスポンス表示部841が設けられる。これは、図17(A)で説明したレスポンスボタン832に対応するもので、インストラクターの呼びかけ等に応じて各ユーザがレスポンスボタン832を押下すると、そのユーザのアイコンがレスポンス表示部841に浮遊するような態様で表示される。インストラクターは、レスポンス表示部841に表示される各ユーザのアイコンの数や、その表示されるスピードから、ユーザのエンゲージメントや熱中度の高さを視覚的に認識できる。ユーザのエンゲージメントが低い場合、インストラクターは、トレーニング動作の機械的な実演指導よりも、ユーザの鼓舞や叱咤激励等のコミュニケーションに重点を移すことで、ユーザのエンゲージメントを高めトレーニング効果の最大化を図ることができる。なお、このようなレスポンス表示部は、図17(A)のユーザ画面に設けてもよい。これにより、ユーザは他のユーザのレスポンスを視覚的に認識できる。特に、トレーニングが盛り上がっている場合、レスポンス表示部に表示される他ユーザからの多数のレスポンスを見ることで、他のユーザとの一体感が強まり高揚感を共有しながらトレーニングに没頭できる。
A response display unit 841 is provided in the area between the condition specification unit 840 and the user list 839. This corresponds to the response button 832 described with reference to FIG. 17A, and when each user presses the response button 832 in response to an instructor's call or the like, the user's icon floats on the response display unit 841. It is displayed in various modes. The instructor can visually recognize the user's engagement and the degree of enthusiasm from the number of icons of each user displayed on the response display unit 841 and the speed at which the icons are displayed. When user engagement is low, the instructor should focus on communication such as inspiration and encouragement of the user rather than mechanical demonstration of the training movement to increase user engagement and maximize the training effect. Can be done. It should be noted that such a response display unit may be provided on the user screen of FIG. 17 (A). This allows the user to visually recognize the response of another user. In particular, when training is exciting, by seeing a large number of responses from other users displayed on the response display unit, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity with other users and immerse themselves in training while sharing an uplifting feeling.
画面左下部の状況表示部842では、ライブ配信中であることを示す表示、VOD録画中であることを示す表示、トレーニングの進行状況(SET 1トレーニング中)の表示等がなされる。
In the status display unit 842 at the lower left of the screen, a display indicating that live distribution is in progress, a display indicating that VOD recording is in progress, a training progress status (SET 1 training in progress), etc. are displayed.
図17(C)は、自重トレーニング時のディレクター画面例である。画面中央には、図17(B)の状況表示部842と同様に「ライブ配信中」「VOD録画中」「SET 1トレーニング中」等の状況表示がなされ、画面右側には、図17(B)のユーザリスト839と同様の表示がなされる。画面左下部には、緊急停止ボタン843が設けられる。ユーザ端末12や機器情報取得部108からディレクター端末12eが取得する情報に基づき、ディレクターがトレーニングの緊急停止の必要性を認識した場合、このボタンを押下することで、ユーザが着用するEMS装置102からの電気刺激の付与を強制的に停止できる。図17(A)で説明したように、ユーザ画面にはユーザ自身が電気刺激を停止する一時停止ボタン836が設けられているものの、ユーザ自身がこのボタンを操作できない場合も想定される。このような場合に、ディレクターが遠隔から停止できるようにすることで、ユーザの安全性を担保する。なお、この緊急停止ボタン843は、全ユーザのEMS装置102を一斉に停止するものでもよいし、特定のユーザを指定して選択的に停止するものでもよいし、両者を選択できるものでもよい。
FIG. 17 (C) is an example of the director screen during self-weight training. Similar to the status display unit 842 in FIG. 17 (B), status displays such as "live distribution", "VOD recording", and "SET 1 training" are displayed in the center of the screen, and FIG. 17 (B) is on the right side of the screen. ) Is displayed in the same manner as the user list 839. An emergency stop button 843 is provided at the lower left of the screen. When the director recognizes the necessity of emergency stop of training based on the information acquired by the director terminal 12e from the user terminal 12 or the device information acquisition unit 108, by pressing this button, the EMS device 102 worn by the user can be used. The application of electrical stimulation can be forcibly stopped. As described with reference to FIG. 17A, although the user screen is provided with a pause button 836 for stopping the electrical stimulation by the user himself / herself, it is assumed that the user himself / herself cannot operate this button. In such a case, the safety of the user is ensured by allowing the director to stop remotely. The emergency stop button 843 may be used to stop the EMS devices 102 of all users all at once, may be selectively stopped by designating a specific user, or both may be selected.
図18(A)は、バイクトレーニング時のユーザ画面例である。画面中央にはトレーニングを実演指導するインストラクターのライブ映像831が表示される。画面左側のバイク情報表示部844には、機器情報取得部108で取得されたバイク103の前述の各種情報が表示される。画面右側のユーザリスト839は、図17と以下の点のみ相違する。まず、TG(トレーニングゲージの略)を単位とするパフォーマンススコアが表示されている。これはバイク情報表示部844に表示される情報等に基づいて独自の演算式で算出されるもので、これに基づきユーザを順位付けできる。各ユーザ領域の左上にはその順位が表示され(2456-2460位)、昇順でユーザが表示される。中央に表示される2458位のユーザは、このユーザ端末12を使用するユーザ自身であり、トレーニング中の自身の順位を容易に確認できる。これにより、他ユーザとの競争意識を高めて、より効果の高いトレーニングが可能となる。このように、デフォルトでは自身を中心とするランキング形式でユーザリスト839が表示されるが、その下部の絞り込みボタンから、年代、性別、「フレンド」や「相互フォロー中」等の関係性等の各種の条件で表示するユーザを絞り込むことができる。絞り込みに加えて、所望の条件で並び替えをできるようにしてもよい。その他の表示情報は基本的には図17と共通である。
FIG. 18A is an example of a user screen during bike training. In the center of the screen, a live video 831 of an instructor who demonstrates and teaches training is displayed. The motorcycle information display unit 844 on the left side of the screen displays the above-mentioned various information of the motorcycle 103 acquired by the device information acquisition unit 108. The user list 839 on the right side of the screen differs from FIG. 17 only in the following points. First, the performance score in units of TG (abbreviation of training gauge) is displayed. This is calculated by an original calculation formula based on the information displayed on the motorcycle information display unit 844, and the users can be ranked based on this. The order is displayed in the upper left of each user area (2456-2460), and the users are displayed in ascending order. The 2458th user displayed in the center is the user himself / herself who uses this user terminal 12, and his / her ranking during training can be easily confirmed. This raises the awareness of competition with other users and enables more effective training. In this way, by default, the user list 839 is displayed in a ranking format centered on itself, but from the narrowing button at the bottom, various relationships such as age, gender, "friends" and "mutual follow-up" etc. It is possible to narrow down the users to be displayed according to the conditions of. In addition to narrowing down, it may be possible to sort according to desired conditions. Other display information is basically the same as in FIG.
図18(B)は、バイクトレーニング時のインストラクター画面例である。画面右側のユーザリスト839は図18(A)と同様だが、画面左側に設けられる条件指定部840で指定可能な絞り込み条件と並べ替え条件によって、より細かく表示を変更できる。また、TGで測定される自己ベストを更新したユーザには「自己ベスト突破」の表示がなされ、インストラクターがそのユーザに個別に声かけ等をすることが可能になる。条件指定部840の絞り込み条件は、ほぼ図17(B)と共通だが、自己ベスト更新ユーザに関する条件が追加されている。また、図示の並び替え条件に基づいて、TGに基づく所定の順位(1位、100位、500位)のユーザがユーザリスト839の先頭に来るように表示を更新できる。なお、ユーザリスト839は、インストラクターの画面上のスクロール操作により上下にスクロール可能である。その他の表示情報は基本的には図17と共通である。
FIG. 18B is an example of an instructor screen during bike training. The user list 839 on the right side of the screen is the same as in FIG. 18A, but the display can be changed more finely by the narrowing condition and the sorting condition that can be specified by the condition specifying unit 840 provided on the left side of the screen. In addition, the user who has updated the personal best measured by TG is displayed as "personal best breakthrough", and the instructor can individually call out to the user. The narrowing-down condition of the condition designation unit 840 is almost the same as that of FIG. 17B, but a condition regarding the personal best update user is added. Further, based on the rearrangement condition shown in the figure, the display can be updated so that the user having a predetermined rank (1st, 100th, 500th) based on the TG comes to the top of the user list 839. The user list 839 can be scrolled up and down by scrolling on the screen of the instructor. Other display information is basically the same as in FIG.
図18(C)は、バイクトレーニング時のディレクター画面例である。基本的には図17(C)と共通であるが、画面右側のユーザリストが図18(B)と同等のものになっている。
FIG. 18C is an example of the director screen during bike training. It is basically the same as FIG. 17 (C), but the user list on the right side of the screen is the same as that of FIG. 18 (B).
図19および図20は、トレーニング終了後にユーザ端末12の表示画面13に表示される各種の画面例を示す。図19(A)は、トレーニング結果を表示する。図示されるように、今回のトレーニングにおける全ユーザ中のランキング(順位)、消費カロリー、走行距離、トレーニングゲージ(パフォーマンススコア)等のトレーニング結果データがサマリー表示される。トレーニングゲージは、今回獲得のものと、累計のものが併せて表示される。ユーザの向上心を刺激し、今後のトレーニングに向けたモチベーションを維持するために、累計トレーニングゲージに応じたステージが設定されており、次のステージに昇格するために必要なトレーニングゲージも併せて表示される。図19(B)は、ステージ昇格時に表示される画面である。ステージが昇格すると、その証として各ステージに応じたバッジが授与される。図19(A)に示されるようなトレーニング結果(このサマリー画面に表示されない詳細データも含む)や、図19(B)に示されるような到達ステージやバッジは、各ユーザのアカウントにログとして保存され、ユーザ自身や、その指導を行うインストラクターが閲覧または管理できる。
19 and 20 show various screen examples displayed on the display screen 13 of the user terminal 12 after the training is completed. FIG. 19A displays the training result. As shown in the figure, training result data such as ranking (ranking), calories burned, mileage, and training gauge (performance score) among all users in this training are displayed in summary. As for the training gauge, the one acquired this time and the cumulative one are displayed together. In order to stimulate the aspirations of users and maintain motivation for future training, stages are set according to the cumulative training gauge, and the training gauge required to promote to the next stage is also displayed. To. FIG. 19B is a screen displayed when the stage is promoted. When a stage is promoted, a badge corresponding to each stage will be awarded as a proof. Training results (including detailed data not displayed on this summary screen) as shown in FIG. 19 (A) and achievement stages and badges as shown in FIG. 19 (B) are saved as logs in each user's account. It can be viewed or managed by the user himself or the instructor who provides the guidance.
図20(A)は、ユーザが所定のミッションをクリアした場合に表示される画面である。ミッションは、運動制御システム100の管理者が適宜作成できるもので、図示される「トレーニング30日達成」のような所定の条件をユーザが達成するとミッションクリアとなる。ミッションの達成条件は任意に設定できるが、例えば「走行距離XXX km以上」「消費カロリーXXX cal以上」等のようにトレーニング結果の数値に関係したものや、「トレーニング参加XXX回以上」「1ヶ月でトレーニングX回以上」等のようにトレーニングへの参加の回数や頻度に関係したものや、「フレンドXX人以上」「お気に入りインストラクターXX人以上」等の他ユーザやインストラクターに関係したものを設定できる。また、ミッションクリアの報酬(リワード)として、運動制御システム100の管理者が提供するサービスや製品の購入に使用できるポイントや、バッジをユーザに与え、ユーザのエンゲージメントを高めることができる。
FIG. 20A is a screen displayed when the user clears a predetermined mission. The mission can be appropriately created by the administrator of the motion control system 100, and the mission is cleared when the user achieves a predetermined condition such as "achievement of 30 days of training" shown in the figure. The mission achievement conditions can be set arbitrarily, but for example, those related to the numerical value of the training result such as "mileage XXX km or more" and "calorie consumption XXX cal or more", "training participation XXX times or more", "1 month" You can set things related to the number and frequency of participation in training such as "training X times or more" and things related to other users and instructors such as "friends XX or more" and "favorite instructor XX or more". .. In addition, as a reward for clearing the mission, points and badges that can be used for purchasing services and products provided by the administrator of the motor control system 100 can be given to the user to enhance the user's engagement.
図20(B)は、トレーニング終了後に、ユーザがインストラクターを評価する画面である。図示されるように、インストラクターの「ホスピタリティ」「指導力」「トーク」「パフォーマンス」「知識」等の所定の評価項目が5段階で評価される。ここでの評価結果は、インストラクターのランキングやプロフィール情報に反映され、ユーザが次回以降のトレーニングにおいてインストラクターを選択するための参考情報となる。インストラクターは、これらの評価情報から自身の要改善項目を認識でき、ランキングを向上させるべくトレーニングの質の向上を図るため、ユーザはお気に入りのインストラクターから質の高いトレーニングを受けることができる。
FIG. 20B is a screen in which the user evaluates the instructor after the training is completed. As shown in the figure, predetermined evaluation items such as "hospitality", "leading ability", "talk", "performance", and "knowledge" of the instructor are evaluated on a five-point scale. The evaluation result here is reflected in the instructor's ranking and profile information, and serves as reference information for the user to select an instructor in the next and subsequent trainings. Instructors can recognize their own improvement items from these evaluation information and improve the quality of training to improve the ranking, so that users can receive high quality training from their favorite instructors.
以上、本発明を実施形態に基づいて説明した。実施形態は例示であり、それらの各構成要素や各処理プロセスの組合せにいろいろな変形例が可能なこと、またそうした変形例も本発明の範囲にあることは当業者に理解されるところである。
The present invention has been described above based on the embodiments. It is understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments are exemplary and that various modifications are possible in the combination of each of these components and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.
実施形態では、一人のインストラクターが多数のユーザを指導する一対多のトレーニング態様を中心に説明したが、一人のインストラクターが一人のユーザを指導する一対一のトレーニング態様にも本発明は適用できる。特に、インストラクターとユーザが同じ場所にいない場合は、実施形態で説明した同期信号生成部401やデータ同期部501の作用によって、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データの同期を取ることができ、ユーザはあたかもインストラクターと同じ場所にいるかのようにトレーニングできる。また、インストラクターがユーザを指導するという態様に限らず、インストラクターがユーザと同一のトレーニングで互いに競争するような態様としてもよい。さらに、バイク等の特定種類のトレーニングを同時刻に行うインストラクターとユーザの組が複数ある場合は、その組の間で競争するような態様でトレーニングを行ってもよい。
In the embodiment, the one-to-many training mode in which one instructor teaches a large number of users has been mainly described, but the present invention can also be applied to the one-to-one training mode in which one instructor teaches one user. In particular, when the instructor and the user are not in the same place, the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data can be synchronized by the action of the synchronization signal generation unit 401 and the data synchronization unit 501 described in the embodiment, and the user can be synchronized. Can train as if they were in the same place as the instructor. Further, the mode is not limited to the mode in which the instructor guides the user, and the mode in which the instructor competes with each other in the same training as the user may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of pairs of instructors and users who perform specific types of training such as motorcycles at the same time, the training may be performed in such a manner as to compete among the pairs.
また、実施形態では、ユーザ端末12は一人のユーザが使用するものとして説明したが、一つのユーザ端末12を複数のユーザが共有しながらトレーニングを行ってもよい。特に、そのユーザ端末12が、テレビ等の大型ディスプレイを備える機器の場合、それが設置された個人スペース81に複数のユーザが集まり、そのディスプレイに映るインストラクターを前にして、あたかもフィットネスジム80にいるかのような臨場感のあるトレーニングを行える。逆に、一つのトレーニングプログラム2の中で複数のインストラクターが順番にまたは同時に登場して、一または複数のユーザを指導してもよい。
Further, in the embodiment, the user terminal 12 has been described as being used by one user, but the training may be performed while a plurality of users share one user terminal 12. In particular, if the user terminal 12 is a device equipped with a large display such as a television, a plurality of users gather in the personal space 81 where the user terminal 12 is installed, and it is as if they are in the fitness gym 80 in front of the instructor shown on the display. You can do realistic training like this. Conversely, a plurality of instructors may appear in sequence or simultaneously in one training program 2 to instruct one or more users.
図21は、変形例に係る運動制御システムによる、フィットネスジム80および個人スペース81におけるトレーニングの一態様を示す。フィットネスジム80では、ユーザ端末12aがユーザ82aにトレーニングプログラムを提供し、ユーザ端末12bがユーザ82bにトレーニングプログラムを提供する例を示す。ユーザ端末12a、12bは、それぞれユーザが着用するフィットネスウェア102a、102bに取り付けられた筋電気刺激装置と無線通信を介して接続し、筋電気刺激装置を制御する。また、ユーザ端末12a、12bは、それぞれ実施形態(図1)における表示画面13a、13bの機能も兼ねるミラーディスプレイ105a、105bに接続され、ミラーディスプレイ105a、105bの表示内容を制御し、お手本となる動きを示す映像を表示する。ユーザ端末12a、12bは、インストラクター83a、83bによって操作される。インストラクター83a、83bは、ユーザ端末12a,12bの近傍にてユーザ82a、82bへ指示や助言を口頭で伝えながら、手本となる動きを見せる。なお、図8等で説明したように、一人のインストラクターが現地および遠隔の多数のユーザに対して同時に同一内容のトレーニング指導をする場合は、ユーザ毎にインストラクターを割り当てなくてもよい。ユーザ端末12a、12bは、ミラーディスプレイ105a、105bに表示するお手本となる動きの映像と、フィットネスウェア102a、102bの筋電気刺激装置への電圧印加を連動させることで、ハイブリッドトレーニングにおける随意運動と不随意運動の同期を実現する。ここで、ミラーディスプレイ105a、105bに表示するお手本となる動きの映像は、カメラ109で撮影されたインストラクターのライブまたはアーカイブの実演映像でもよいし、CG等で作成された人体の形状を持つ動作モデルの映像でもよい。
FIG. 21 shows an aspect of training in the fitness gym 80 and the personal space 81 by the exercise control system according to the modified example. In the fitness gym 80, an example is shown in which the user terminal 12a provides a training program to the user 82a, and the user terminal 12b provides the training program to the user 82b. The user terminals 12a and 12b are connected to the muscle electrical stimulator attached to the fitness wear 102a and 102b worn by the user via wireless communication to control the muscle electrical stimulator. Further, the user terminals 12a and 12b are connected to the mirror displays 105a and 105b which also have the functions of the display screens 13a and 13b in the embodiment (FIG. 1), respectively, and control the display contents of the mirror displays 105a and 105b to serve as a model. Display an image showing movement. The user terminals 12a and 12b are operated by the instructors 83a and 83b. The instructors 83a and 83b show model movements while verbally giving instructions and advice to the users 82a and 82b in the vicinity of the user terminals 12a and 12b. As described with reference to FIG. 8 and the like, when one instructor gives training guidance of the same content to a large number of local and remote users at the same time, it is not necessary to assign an instructor to each user. The user terminals 12a and 12b link the video of the movement as a model displayed on the mirror displays 105a and 105b with the voltage application to the muscle electrical stimulator of the fitness wear 102a and 102b, so that the voluntary movement and the involuntary movement in the hybrid training are not possible. Achieve synchronization of voluntary movements. Here, the image of the movement as a model to be displayed on the mirror displays 105a and 105b may be a live or archive demonstration image of the instructor taken by the camera 109, or an operation model having a human body shape created by CG or the like. It may be a video of.
ユーザ端末12a、12bは、それぞれスタンドアロンでもよいし、ネットワークを介して互いに連動してもよいし、インターネットなどのネットワークを介して運動制御管理サーバに接続され、運動制御管理サーバから受け取る指示に基づいて各ユーザに前述したようなトレーニングプログラム2を提供してもよい。ユーザ端末12a、12bは、複数人に対して個別にトレーニングプログラムを提供するために各ミラーディスプレイ105a、105bに個別のタイミングで個別の内容を表示させることもできるが、上記の「一インストラクター」対「多ユーザ」のトレーニングにおいては、ユーザ端末12a、12bは、後述する個々のユーザの姿勢情報を除き、同一の情報をトレーニングプログラム2およびプログラム制御部3を介してミラーディスプレイ105a、105bに表示させるのが好ましい。
The user terminals 12a and 12b may be stand-alone or interlocked with each other via a network, or are connected to a motion control management server via a network such as the Internet, and are based on instructions received from the motion control management server. The training program 2 as described above may be provided to each user. The user terminals 12a and 12b can display individual contents on the mirror displays 105a and 105b at individual timings in order to individually provide a training program to a plurality of people. In the "multi-user" training, the user terminals 12a and 12b display the same information on the mirror displays 105a and 105b via the training program 2 and the program control unit 3, except for the posture information of each user described later. Is preferable.
一方、家庭などの個人スペース81では、ユーザ端末12cが、個人スペース81でトレーニングをするユーザ82cにトレーニングプログラムを提供する。個人スペース81で使用されるユーザ端末12cは、フィットネスウェア102cに取り付けられた筋電気刺激装置と無線通信を介して接続し、筋電気刺激装置を制御する。ユーザ端末12cは、ディスプレイを兼ねたタブレット端末等の電子機器である。
On the other hand, in a personal space 81 such as a home, the user terminal 12c provides a training program to the user 82c who trains in the personal space 81. The user terminal 12c used in the personal space 81 is connected to the muscle electrical stimulator attached to the fitness wear 102c via wireless communication to control the muscle electrical stimulator. The user terminal 12c is an electronic device such as a tablet terminal that also serves as a display.
図22は、ミラーディスプレイ105の構成を示す。ミラーディスプレイ105は、ミラー1051と、表示制御装置1052と、表示装置1053と、姿勢センサ1054を備える。表示制御装置1052は、ユーザ端末12で実行されるトレーニングプログラムにしたがい、ミラーディスプレイ105に運動の映像を表示するコンピュータである。姿勢センサ1054は、ミラーディスプレイ105の前に立つユーザ82に向けて赤外線を投光するとともに、対象物を反射した赤外線を検出する赤外線センサおよびイメージセンサにより対象物であるユーザの深度を検出して距離画像を得る。その検出結果に基づいてユーザの姿勢を推定し、推定結果に基づくユーザの骨格モデル等の映像をミラーディスプレイ105の表示装置1053に表示させる。
FIG. 22 shows the configuration of the mirror display 105. The mirror display 105 includes a mirror 1051, a display control device 1052, a display device 1053, and an attitude sensor 1054. The display control device 1052 is a computer that displays an image of exercise on the mirror display 105 according to a training program executed by the user terminal 12. The attitude sensor 1054 emits infrared rays toward the user 82 standing in front of the mirror display 105, and detects the depth of the user who is the object by the infrared sensor and the image sensor that detect the infrared rays reflected from the object. Get a range image. The posture of the user is estimated based on the detection result, and the image of the user's skeleton model or the like based on the estimation result is displayed on the display device 1053 of the mirror display 105.
ミラー1051は、正面側においてユーザ82の全身の像を反射し得る姿見の大きさである一方、背面側から赤外線と電波を透過させる場合の透過損失が低く抑えられたミラーである。表示装置1053はミラー1051の面積よりやや小さい程度の画面を有してユーザ82の全身に相当する身体モデルを大きく表示できる、例えば70インチディスプレイ相当の縦型画面を有する表示装置である。表示装置1053をミラー1051の背面側に設置すると、ユーザ82はミラー1051の正面側からミラー1051を透過する表示装置1053の画面上の画像を視認できる。ミラー1051や表示装置1053は、少なくとも画面の上端がユーザ82の目線より上に位置するように設置し、例えば平均的なユーザ82の身長より高く位置するように設置する。表示装置1053としては、液晶表示装置、有機EL表示装置やプロジェクターおよびスクリーンといった一般的な映像出力装置を用いることができる。
The mirror 1051 is a mirror having a size that can reflect the image of the whole body of the user 82 on the front side, while the transmission loss when transmitting infrared rays and radio waves from the back side is suppressed to a low level. The display device 1053 is a display device having a screen slightly smaller than the area of the mirror 1051 and capable of displaying a large body model corresponding to the whole body of the user 82, for example, a vertical screen equivalent to a 70-inch display. When the display device 1053 is installed on the back side of the mirror 1051, the user 82 can visually recognize the image on the screen of the display device 1053 that passes through the mirror 1051 from the front side of the mirror 1051. The mirror 1051 and the display device 1053 are installed so that at least the upper end of the screen is located above the line of sight of the user 82, for example, the mirror 1051 and the display device 1053 are installed so as to be located higher than the height of the average user 82. As the display device 1053, a general video output device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a projector, and a screen can be used.
姿勢センサ1054は、赤外線を投光する赤外線プロジェクター、対象物に反射した赤外線を検知する赤外線センサ、対象物からの反射光を捉えて画像を取得するCMOSセンサなどのイメージセンサ、指向性マイク等を含んで構成される。姿勢センサ1054は、対象物に赤外線を投光してその反射した赤外線を赤外線センサが検出することで対象物の距離(深度、奥行き)を測定し、その対象物からの反射光をイメージセンサが捉えることで距離画像を取得する。変形例として、姿勢センサ1054を表示制御装置1052と一体化させた裏面照射型ToF距離画像センサを採用してもよい。姿勢センサ1054は、例えば床からの高さ約55cmの位置に水平に設置され、水平方向約70度および垂直方向約60度の画角でユーザ82の姿勢を検出する。また姿勢センサ1054の検出可能範囲にユーザ82が収まるようにするための推奨するトレーニングスペースの範囲が床に描かれる。トレーニングスペースは、ミラー1051から約2.5m付近を中心とする円形状として設置され、そのトレーニングスペース内にいるユーザ82しか認識しないようにするため、ミラー1051から約2.5m前後の距離範囲以外の検出を除外して2.5m前後のユーザ82だけを検出対象とする処理をする。例えば、ユーザ82が所定のトレーニングスペースを出てミラー1051に近づいたりすると、姿勢センサ1054による検出対象から外れて画面がブラックアウトする一方、ユーザ82の背後(トレーニングスペースの外側)を別の人が通っても検出されない。また、誤検出を防止するために、ユーザ82の背後にはロールスクリーン等の衝立を設置し、また、部屋の壁側に沿って対面する形でミラー1051を設置することで、ミラー1051同士が最も離れるような位置関係とする。以上により、姿勢センサ1054による検出精度を高く維持することができる。さらなる変形例としては、姿勢センサ1054の代わりにジャイロセンサやポテンショメータといった機械的な装置をユーザ82に装着してもよいし、磁気センサによる磁場の変動等のモーションキャプチャに用いる一般的な検出技術を用いてもよい。
The attitude sensor 1054 includes an infrared projector that emits infrared rays, an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays reflected on an object, an image sensor such as a CMOS sensor that captures reflected light from an object and acquires an image, a directional microphone, and the like. Consists of including. The attitude sensor 1054 measures the distance (depth, depth) of the object by projecting infrared rays onto the object and detecting the reflected infrared rays, and the image sensor detects the reflected light from the object. Acquire a distance image by capturing. As a modification, a back-illuminated ToF distance image sensor in which the posture sensor 1054 is integrated with the display control device 1052 may be adopted. The attitude sensor 1054 is installed horizontally, for example, at a position about 55 cm above the floor, and detects the attitude of the user 82 at an angle of view of about 70 degrees in the horizontal direction and about 60 degrees in the vertical direction. Also, a range of recommended training spaces for the user 82 to fit within the detectable range of the posture sensor 1054 is drawn on the floor. The training space is installed as a circular shape centered around about 2.5 m from the mirror 1051, and in order to recognize only the user 82 in the training space, other than the distance range of about 2.5 m from the mirror 1051. Is excluded, and only the user 82 of about 2.5 m is targeted for detection. For example, when the user 82 leaves the predetermined training space and approaches the mirror 1051, the screen is blacked out from the detection target by the attitude sensor 1054, while another person is behind the user 82 (outside the training space). It is not detected even if it passes. Further, in order to prevent erroneous detection, a roll screen or the like is installed behind the user 82, and mirrors 1051 are installed facing each other along the wall side of the room so that the mirrors 1051 can be connected to each other. The positional relationship should be the most distant. As described above, the detection accuracy by the attitude sensor 1054 can be maintained high. As a further modification, a mechanical device such as a gyro sensor or a potentiometer may be attached to the user 82 instead of the attitude sensor 1054, or a general detection technique used for motion capture of a fluctuation of a magnetic field by a magnetic sensor may be used. You may use it.
図22に示される設置例において、姿勢センサ1054は、ミラー1051の背面側において表示装置1053より下に水平に設置され、その高さは床から約55cmである。姿勢センサ1054の姿勢検出範囲206は、例えば水平方向70度、垂直方向60度の画角であり、姿勢センサ1054から約2.5mの位置に立つユーザ82の全身を検出できるように構成される。ここで、姿勢センサ1054を仮に表示装置1053の上に設置する場合、上方からユーザ82を見下ろすような角度で検出することとなり、この場合、ミラー1051への入射角が大きくなるため、ミラー1051のガラスを介した姿勢検出がガラスの屈折の影響を受けるおそれがある。これに対し、姿勢センサ1054を表示装置1053の下に設置する場合、水平に設置できるため、ミラー1051のガラスによる屈折の影響を受けにくくすることができる。また、姿勢センサ1054をミラー1051の背面側、かつ、表示装置1053の下方に設置することで、姿勢センサ1054を目立ちにくくできるだけでなく、埃をかぶりにくくすることができる。なお、表示制御装置1052内に設けられる姿勢推定部は、ユーザ82以外の人、例えばユーザ82に動きをアドバイスするインストラクター83が検出範囲に侵入した場合であっても、検出対象をユーザ82のみに限定し、インストラクター83を検出対象から除外する処理をする。また、床上にはインストラクター83の立ち位置を所定領域に制限するマークを描いてもよい。変形例として、床の位置が上下動して高さを調整可能な構成であってもよい。ユーザ82が運動する床は、弾力性ないしクッション性のある緩衝部材で構成することで、隣接するブースのユーザに振動が伝わりにくくする。逆に、ミラー1051を設置する床は、ユーザ82が運動する床より固い材質とすることで、ユーザ82の運動による振動がミラー1051に伝わりにくくして、センサの計測への影響を抑制する。
In the installation example shown in FIG. 22, the attitude sensor 1054 is horizontally installed below the display device 1053 on the back side of the mirror 1051, and its height is about 55 cm from the floor. The posture detection range 206 of the posture sensor 1054 has an angle of view of, for example, 70 degrees in the horizontal direction and 60 degrees in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to detect the whole body of the user 82 standing at a position of about 2.5 m from the posture sensor 1054. .. Here, if the attitude sensor 1054 is temporarily installed on the display device 1053, it will be detected at an angle that looks down on the user 82 from above. In this case, the angle of incidence on the mirror 1051 becomes large, so that the mirror 1051 Orientation detection through the glass may be affected by the refraction of the glass. On the other hand, when the attitude sensor 1054 is installed under the display device 1053, it can be installed horizontally, so that it can be less affected by the refraction caused by the glass of the mirror 1051. Further, by installing the attitude sensor 1054 on the back side of the mirror 1051 and below the display device 1053, it is possible not only to make the attitude sensor 1054 inconspicuous but also to make it difficult to cover dust. The posture estimation unit provided in the display control device 1052 limits the detection target to only the user 82 even when a person other than the user 82, for example, an instructor 83 who advises the user 82 to move, enters the detection range. The process of limiting and excluding the instructor 83 from the detection target is performed. Further, a mark may be drawn on the floor to limit the standing position of the instructor 83 to a predetermined area. As a modification, the floor position may be moved up and down to adjust the height. The floor on which the user 82 moves is made of an elastic or cushioning cushioning member, so that vibration is less likely to be transmitted to the user in the adjacent booth. On the contrary, the floor on which the mirror 1051 is installed is made of a material harder than the floor on which the user 82 moves, so that the vibration due to the movement of the user 82 is less likely to be transmitted to the mirror 1051 and the influence on the measurement of the sensor is suppressed.
図23は、姿勢センサ1054を用いて、ユーザ82の動作状態をオブジェクトによってミラーディスプレイ105に表示する画面例の図である。表示装置1053の画面において、右下隅に動作モデル212を表示し、ユーザ82が行うべき動作を動作モデル212の動きによって示す。なお、動作モデル212は、カメラ109で撮影されたインストラクターのライブまたはアーカイブの実演映像でもよい。本図は「EXPANDER」と呼ばれる、両腕を拡縮する動作に対応する画面例である。姿勢センサ1054で検出したユーザ82の両手に対応する位置を示すための二重円形オブジェクトである第1位置状態画像220aと第2位置状態画像220bが黄色で表示され、ユーザ82が両腕を広げると、第1位置状態画像220a、第2位置状態画像220bがユーザ82の両手に追随する形で横方向へ広がるように移動するとともに、オレンジ色に変化する。このとき、動作状態を示す二重菱形オブジェクトである動作状態画像222もまた、ユーザ82の両腕の動きに追随して横方向へ伸張するように変形する。両腕を広げきった位置に達すると第1位置状態画像220aと第2位置状態画像220bは黄色に戻るとともに、次の動作に先立って動作状態画像222から枠形状のみの菱形オブジェクトが分離して横方向へ収縮するように変形することにより次は収縮する動作であることを案内する。
FIG. 23 is a diagram of a screen example in which the operating state of the user 82 is displayed on the mirror display 105 by an object using the posture sensor 1054. On the screen of the display device 1053, the motion model 212 is displayed in the lower right corner, and the motion to be performed by the user 82 is indicated by the motion of the motion model 212. The motion model 212 may be a live or archive demonstration video of the instructor taken by the camera 109. This figure is an example of a screen called "EXPANDER" corresponding to the movement of expanding and contracting both arms. The first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b, which are double circular objects for indicating the positions corresponding to both hands of the user 82 detected by the posture sensor 1054, are displayed in yellow, and the user 82 spreads both arms. Then, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b move laterally so as to follow both hands of the user 82, and change to orange. At this time, the operation state image 222, which is a double rhombus object showing the operation state, is also deformed so as to follow the movements of both arms of the user 82 and extend laterally. When the position where both arms are fully spread is reached, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b return to yellow, and the diamond-shaped object having only a frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 prior to the next operation. By deforming so as to contract in the lateral direction, it is guided that the next operation is to contract.
ユーザ82が両腕を収縮させると、第1位置状態画像220a、第2位置状態画像220bがユーザ82の両手に追随する形で収縮するように中央に向かって移動するとともに、オレンジ色に変化する。このとき、動作状態を示す動作状態画像222もまた、ユーザ82の両腕の動きに追随して収縮するように変形する。両腕が収縮しきった位置に達すると第1位置状態画像220aと第2位置状態画像220bは黄色に戻るとともに、次の動作に先立って第1位置状態画像220aと第2位置状態画像220bは両手の移動目標位置へ移動することで次の動作を案内するとともに動作状態画像222も第1位置状態画像220aと第2位置状態画像220bに追随して移動する。また、動作状態画像222から枠形状のみの菱形オブジェクトが分離して横方向へ伸張するように変形することにより次の動作が両腕を伸張する動作であることを案内する。
When the user 82 contracts both arms, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b move toward the center so as to follow both hands of the user 82 and change to orange. .. At this time, the operation state image 222 showing the operation state is also deformed so as to follow the movements of both arms of the user 82 and contract. When both arms reach the fully contracted position, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b return to yellow, and the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b are both hands prior to the next operation. By moving to the movement target position of, the next operation is guided, and the operation state image 222 also moves following the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b. Further, the rhombus object having only a frame shape is separated from the motion state image 222 and deformed so as to extend laterally, thereby guiding that the next motion is the motion of extending both arms.
このように、ユーザ82が両腕を広げるべきタイミングではユーザ82の動きに先行して動作状態画像222から枠形状が分離して横方向に広がる動きを見せ、ユーザ82が両腕を縮めるべきタイミングではユーザ82の動きに先行して動作状態画像222から枠形状が分離して横方向に収縮する動きを見せる。また第1位置状態画像220a、第2位置状態画像220bもまたユーザ82の動きに先行して目標位置へ移動する。こうして、ユーザ82が次に行うべき方向を視覚的に直感で把握できるように案内しつつ、実際のユーザ82の動作にも追随して動作状態を視覚化することで、ユーザ82に自身の動きを視覚的に把握しやすくすることができる。他の動作においても同様の画面によって、ユーザ82の動作目標と動作状態が動作モデル212や位置状態画像220、動作状態画像222等によって示される。ここで、図1における映像データ2Bの例として説明した、トレーニング動作を表すエフェクト映像を図23のオブジェクトの背景に併せて表示すれば、ユーザ82はそのエフェクト映像からも次に行うべき動作を認識できる。
In this way, at the timing when the user 82 should spread both arms, the frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 and shows a movement which spreads laterally prior to the movement of the user 82, and the timing when the user 82 should contract both arms. Then, prior to the movement of the user 82, the frame shape is separated from the operation state image 222 and shows a movement of contracting in the lateral direction. Further, the first position state image 220a and the second position state image 220b also move to the target position prior to the movement of the user 82. In this way, while guiding the user 82 to visually and intuitively grasp the direction to be performed next, by following the actual operation of the user 82 and visualizing the operation state, the user 82 moves himself / herself. Can be easily grasped visually. In other operations, the operation target and the operation state of the user 82 are shown by the operation model 212, the position state image 220, the operation state image 222, and the like on the same screen. Here, if the effect image showing the training operation described as an example of the image data 2B in FIG. 1 is displayed together with the background of the object in FIG. 23, the user 82 recognizes the operation to be performed next from the effect image. can.
画面右上には、円形ゲージによって所定動作の規定回数までの残り回数が示されるとともに、その円形ゲージの中に表示される数字によっても残り回数が示される。本図のようなオブジェクトを用いた表示により、各トレーニング項目およびウォームアップ、コンディショニング、クールダウン等の各メニューが表示される。
In the upper right corner of the screen, the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times of the predetermined operation is shown by the circular gauge, and the remaining number of times is also shown by the number displayed in the circular gauge. By displaying using objects as shown in this figure, each training item and each menu such as warm-up, conditioning, and cool-down are displayed.
図24は、第1~第4の画面例を示す。本図(a)の第1画面例は「SQUAT&FLY」(スクワット&フライ)の画面であり、上半身は肘を90度に曲げた状態で腕を上にあげ、両腕を閉じたり広げたりし、下半身は腕を閉じる動きに合わせて腰を落とし、広げる動きに合わせて腰を上げる動作である。すなわち、周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両腕を閉じながら腰を落とす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両腕を広げながら腰を上げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、大胸筋、広背筋を特に意識する。また、上半身は腕(肩)の水平方向に開くときの移動範囲の角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。また、下半身は膝から腰にかけての大腿部と水平面との角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
FIG. 24 shows an example of the first to fourth screens. The first screen example of this figure (a) is the screen of "SQUAT & FLY". The upper body has the elbows bent 90 degrees, the arms are raised, and both arms are closed and spread. The lower half of the body is a movement that lowers the waist according to the movement of closing the arms and raises the waist according to the movement of spreading. That is, while the electric stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 4 seconds, both arms are closed and the hips are lowered. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, pectoralis major muscle, and latissimus dorsi muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the angle of the movement range when the upper body is opened in the horizontal direction of the arm (shoulder). Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(b)の第2画面例は「SQUAT&LAT-PULLDOWN」(スクワット&ラット・プルダウン)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両腕を下げながら腰を落とす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両肘を伸ばして両腕を上方に広げながら腰を上げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、大胸筋、広背筋を特に意識する。また、上半身は腕の上げ下げ動作における上腕の移動範囲の角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。また、下半身は膝から腰にかけての大腿部と水平面との角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The second screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "SQUAT & LAT-PULLDOWN" (squat & lat pull-down). Here, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds, the action of lowering the hips while lowering both arms is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, both elbows are extended while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It raises its hips while spreading its arms upward, and pauses for 2 seconds. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, pectoralis major muscle, and latissimus dorsi muscle. Further, the upper body changes the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 according to the angle of the movement range of the upper arm in the raising and lowering motion of the arm. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(c)の第3画面例は「SQUAT&ARM CURL」(スクワット&アーム・カール)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両前腕を上げながら腰を落とす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両前腕を下げながら腰を上げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、上腕二頭筋、上腕三頭筋を特に意識する。また、上半身は前腕の上げ下げ動作の移動範囲の角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。また、下半身は膝から腰にかけての大腿部と水平面との角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The third screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "SQUAT & ARM CURL" (squat & arm curl). Here, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds, the action of lowering the hips while raising both forearms is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz again for 4 seconds, both forearms are lowered. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the biceps brachii muscle, and the triceps brachii muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the upper body change according to the angle of the movement range of the forearm raising and lowering motion. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 of the lower body change according to the angle between the thigh and the horizontal plane from the knee to the waist. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(d)の第4画面例は「CHEST PRESS」(チェスト・プレス)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両前腕を水平にしたまま前方に押し出す動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両前腕を水平にしたまま後方に引き戻す動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、広背筋、腹直筋を特に意識する。また、前腕を水平にしたまま前後に移動させる移動量(例えば、前腕の中点が肩に揃う位置から腕を伸ばしきる位置までの範囲の移動量)に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The fourth screen example of this figure (d) is the screen of "CHEST PRESS" (chest press). Here, while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 4 seconds, both forearms are pushed forward while keeping them horizontal, and after pausing for 2 seconds, both forearms are pushed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It pulls back while keeping it horizontal, and pauses for 2 seconds. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, latissimus dorsi muscle, and rectus abdominis muscle. In addition, the position and color of the position state image 220 according to the amount of movement to move the forearm back and forth while keeping it horizontal (for example, the amount of movement in the range from the position where the midpoint of the forearm is aligned with the shoulder to the position where the arm is fully extended). Or, the color and shape of the operating state image 222 change. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
図25は、第5~第8の画面例を示す。本図(a)の第5画面例は図23にも示した「EXPANDER」(エキスパンダー)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両腕を閉じた状態から左右に広げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両腕を閉じる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。これを1セットとして5セット繰り返した後、次は右腕が斜め上で左腕が斜め下になるよう両腕を斜めに広げて閉じる動作を5セット繰り返し、最後に左腕が斜め上で右腕が斜め下になるよう両腕を斜めに広げて閉じる動作を5セット繰り返す。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、広背筋、腹直筋を特に意識する。また、腕の水平方向の移動角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。この後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
FIG. 25 shows an example of the fifth to eighth screens. The fifth screen example of this figure (a) is the screen of the “EXPANDER” (expander) also shown in FIG. 23. Here, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds, both arms are expanded from the closed state to the left and right, and after a pause of 2 seconds, both arms are opened again while an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 4 seconds. It closes and pauses for 2 seconds. After repeating this for 5 sets as one set, the next operation is to open and close both arms diagonally so that the right arm is diagonally upward and the left arm is diagonally downward, and finally the left arm is diagonally upward and the right arm is diagonally downward. Repeat 5 sets of closing arms with both arms spread diagonally. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, latissimus dorsi muscle, and rectus abdominis muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the horizontal movement angle of the arm. After that, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of a total of 30 seconds during which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(b)の第6画面例は「LUNGE TWIST」(ランジ・ツイスト)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に腰を捻りながら腰を落とす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に腰の捻りを戻しながら腰を上げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。これを1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、次は6秒間の間に脚の左右を切り替え、反対方向に腰を捻る動作を8セット繰り返す。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、腹直筋、腹斜筋を特に意識する。また、体の中心の垂直線を軸に肩を水平方向に回転させる移動角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。この後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The sixth screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "Lunge TWIST" (lunge twist). Here, the operation of lowering the hips while twisting the hips while applying the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds is performed, and after pausing for 2 seconds, the twist of the hips is returned while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. It raises its hips and pauses for 2 seconds. After repeating this for 8 sets as one set, the operation of switching the left and right legs in 6 seconds and twisting the hips in the opposite direction is repeated for 8 sets. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the rectus abdominis muscle, and the oblique abdominal muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the movement angle of rotating the shoulder in the horizontal direction about the vertical line at the center of the body. After that, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of a total of 30 seconds during which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(c)の第7画面例は「LUNGE SIDE VENT」(ランジ・サイド・ベント)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に上体を片側に倒しながら腰を落とす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に上体を戻しながら腰を上げる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。これを1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、次は6秒間の間に脚の左右を切り替え、反対方向に上体を倒しながら腰を落とす動作を8セット繰り返す。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、腹直筋、腹斜筋を特に意識する。また、両肩を結ぶ線を側方へ傾ける動きの水平面に対する傾き角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。この後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The seventh screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "Lunge SIDE VENT" (lunge side vent). Here, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds, the upper body is tilted to one side and the hips are lowered. It raises its hips while returning, and pauses for 2 seconds. After repeating this for 8 sets as one set, the left and right legs are switched within 6 seconds, and the operation of lowering the waist while tilting the upper body in the opposite direction is repeated for 8 sets. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the rectus abdominis muscle, and the oblique abdominal muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the tilt angle of the movement of tilting the line connecting both shoulders laterally with respect to the horizontal plane. After that, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of a total of 30 seconds during which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
本図(d)の第8画面例は「KICKBACK」(キックバック)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に肘を中心にして両前腕を下から前方に上げるように回転させる動作をし、2秒間の一時停止の後、再び周波数20Hzの電気刺激を4秒加える間に両前腕を下に下ろす動作をし、2秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、ユーザは大腿部、上腕二頭筋、上腕三頭筋を特に意識する。また、肘を中心とした前腕の前後方向の回転角度に応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色や、動作状態画像222の色および形状が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして8セット繰り返した後、15秒間の一時停止期間と、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を15秒加える期間の合計30秒間の休憩となる。
The eighth screen example of this figure (d) is the screen of "KICKBACK" (kickback). Here, while applying an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz for 4 seconds, the operation is performed so that both forearms are raised from the bottom to the front around the elbow, and after a pause for 2 seconds, the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied again for 4 seconds. While adding seconds, both forearms are lowered, and a pause of 2 seconds is entered. At this time, the user pays particular attention to the thigh, the biceps brachii muscle, and the triceps brachii muscle. Further, the position and color of the position state image 220 and the color and shape of the operation state image 222 change according to the rotation angle of the forearm around the elbow in the front-back direction. After repeating the above operation for 8 sets as one set, there is a pause period of 15 seconds and a break of 30 seconds in total, which is a period in which an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied for 15 seconds.
図26は、第9~第11の画面例を示す。本図(a)の第9画面例は「PUNCH」(パンチ)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を5秒加える間は姿勢を固定し、周波数4Hzの電気刺激を10秒加える間に指定の方向にパンチする動作をし、3秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、所定の複数の空中位置のうち指定された位置へ手を伸ばすことができたか否かに応じて位置状態画像220の位置および色が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして5セット繰り返した後、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を上半身から下半身にかけて20秒ずつ、合計60秒加えるクールダウンの後、運動プログラムが終了となる。
FIG. 26 shows an example of the ninth to eleventh screens. The ninth screen example of this figure (a) is a “Punch” screen. Here, the posture is fixed while the electric stimulus having a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the operation of punching in a specified direction is performed while the electric stimulus having a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered. At this time, the position and color of the position state image 220 change depending on whether or not the user could reach the designated position among the predetermined plurality of aerial positions. After repeating the above operation for 5 sets as one set, an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
本図(b)の第10画面例は「KNEE&ELBOW」(ニー&エルボー)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を5秒加える間は姿勢を固定し、周波数4Hzの電気刺激を10秒加える間に肘と膝を近づける動作を繰り返し、3秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、肘と膝との間の距離が所定値以内であるかに応じて位置状態画像220の色が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして5セット繰り返した後、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を上半身から下半身にかけて20秒ずつ、合計60秒加えるクールダウンの後、運動プログラムが終了となる。
The tenth screen example of this figure (b) is the screen of "KNEE & ELBOW". Here, the posture is fixed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the movement of bringing the elbow and the knee close to each other is repeated while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered. At this time, the color of the position state image 220 changes depending on whether the distance between the elbow and the knee is within a predetermined value. After repeating the above operation for 5 sets as one set, an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
本図(c)の第11画面例は「HIGH KNEE」(ハイ・ニー)の画面である。ここでは周波数20Hzの電気刺激を5秒加える間は姿勢を固定し、周波数4Hzの電気刺激を10秒加える間に腿上げダッシュの動作をし、3秒間の一時停止が入る。このとき、膝の位置が所定高さまで上がるか否かに応じて位置状態画像220の色が変化する。以上の動作を1セットとして5セット繰り返した後、周波数2Hzの電気刺激を上半身から下半身にかけて20秒ずつ、合計60秒加えるクールダウンの後、運動プログラムが終了となる。
The eleventh screen example of this figure (c) is the screen of "HIGH KNEE". Here, the posture is fixed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 20 Hz is applied for 5 seconds, and the thigh-raising dash is performed while the electrical stimulus with a frequency of 4 Hz is applied for 10 seconds, and a pause for 3 seconds is entered. At this time, the color of the position state image 220 changes depending on whether or not the position of the knee rises to a predetermined height. After repeating the above operation for 5 sets as one set, an electrical stimulus with a frequency of 2 Hz is applied from the upper body to the lower body for 20 seconds each for a total of 60 seconds, and then the exercise program is completed.
以上のように、位置状態画像220や動作状態画像222などの状態オブジェクト218の形状や色、配置の変化により、回数、時間、位置、距離、角度、範囲などを示して、動作状況および動作が適切かどうかをユーザに視覚的に示すことができる。ユーザは図形の変化を視認することで、運動の負荷を身体だけでなく視覚からも直感的に把握することができる。
As described above, the number of times, time, position, distance, angle, range, etc. are indicated by the change in the shape, color, and arrangement of the state object 218 such as the position state image 220 and the operation state image 222, and the operation status and operation can be changed. You can visually indicate to the user whether it is appropriate. By visually recognizing the change in the figure, the user can intuitively grasp the load of exercise not only from the body but also from the visual sense.
以上の例では、フィットネスジム80において、ミラーディスプレイ105に内蔵された姿勢センサ1054によって生成される状態オブジェクト218をミラーディスプレイ105の表示装置1053に表示したが、ミラーディスプレイ105のない個人スペース81でも同様のトレーニングが可能である。すなわち、ユーザ端末12cその他の電子機器に内蔵された各種センサを利用してユーザの姿勢を検知でき、それに基づいて生成された状態オブジェクト218を、図23の例のように、ユーザ端末12cの表示画面13cや、個人スペース81にあるテレビ等の大型ディスプレイに表示させることができる。これにより、個人スペース81にいるユーザは、動作モデル212やインストラクターの実演映像による手本となる動きを参照しながら、自身の姿勢と関連付けられた次の動きの方向を状態オブジェクト218で確認し、効果的にトレーニングできる。
In the above example, in the fitness gym 80, the state object 218 generated by the attitude sensor 1054 built in the mirror display 105 is displayed on the display device 1053 of the mirror display 105, but the same applies to the personal space 81 without the mirror display 105. Training is possible. That is, the posture of the user can be detected by using various sensors built in the user terminal 12c and other electronic devices, and the state object 218 generated based on the sensor can be displayed on the user terminal 12c as shown in the example of FIG. It can be displayed on the screen 13c or a large display such as a television in the personal space 81. As a result, the user in the personal space 81 confirms the direction of the next movement associated with his / her posture with the state object 218 while referring to the movement model 212 and the movement as a model by the instructor's demonstration video. You can train effectively.
また、以上の例では、ユーザの姿勢を検知するセンサについて詳述したが、それ以外の各種のセンサを利用することで、トレーニング中のユーザの情報を収集し、インストラクターによるリアルタイムの指導、トレーニング後のユーザへのアドバイスの提供、トレーニングプログラムの改善などに活用できる。例えば、心拍、体温、血圧、血糖値などの生体データを測定する生体センサを活用すれば、トレーニング中のユーザの身体の状況を精緻に把握でき、それに応じた指導等を行える。また、特定のユーザの生体データに異常が生じた場合は、自動で、または、そのアラート通知を受けたディレクターが手動で、そのユーザのEMS装置102を緊急停止できる。本実施形態のトレーニングでは、ユーザが上半身および下半身にEMS装置102を着用するため、EMS装置102にこのような生体センサを設けるのが好適である。特に、本実施形態のEMS装置102は肌との接触面積が大きいフィットネスウェアとして構成されるため、各生体データの測定に適した身体箇所に各生体センサを設けることができ、様々な種類の生体データを高精度に取得できる。同様に、加速度センサや角加速度センサ等のユーザの動きを検知するセンサを、上半身および下半身のEMS装置102の各部に設けることで、ユーザの各部位の動きを精緻に把握できる。これらのセンサに基づき、ユーザが転倒したことを検知した場合は、上記の生体データ異常の場合と同様、EMS装置102を緊急停止できる。EMS装置102外のセンサとして、タブレットやスマートフォン等の画像センサでトレーニング中のユーザの動きを撮影することで、上記の例で説明したようなリアルタイムでの姿勢検知や転倒検知、映像に基づく運動解析アルゴリズムを介したアドバイス情報の生成などに活用できる。また、ユーザがトレーニングを行う際の温度、湿度、日照量などの測定データを活用してもよい。
In addition, in the above example, the sensor that detects the posture of the user has been described in detail, but by using various other sensors, information on the user during training can be collected, real-time instruction by the instructor, and after training. It can be used to provide advice to users and improve training programs. For example, if a biosensor that measures biometric data such as heart rate, body temperature, blood pressure, and blood glucose level is utilized, the physical condition of the user during training can be grasped precisely, and guidance or the like can be provided accordingly. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the biometric data of a specific user, the EMS device 102 of the user can be stopped in an emergency automatically or manually by the director who received the alert notification. In the training of the present embodiment, since the user wears the EMS device 102 on the upper body and the lower body, it is preferable to provide such a biosensor on the EMS device 102. In particular, since the EMS device 102 of the present embodiment is configured as fitness wear having a large contact area with the skin, each biosensor can be provided at a body portion suitable for measuring each biometric data, and various types of living organisms can be provided. Data can be acquired with high accuracy. Similarly, by providing sensors such as an acceleration sensor and an angular acceleration sensor for detecting the movement of the user in each part of the EMS device 102 of the upper body and the lower body, the movement of each part of the user can be grasped precisely. When it is detected that the user has fallen based on these sensors, the EMS device 102 can be stopped urgently as in the case of the above-mentioned biometric data abnormality. By photographing the movement of the user during training with an image sensor such as a tablet or smartphone as a sensor outside the EMS device 102, real-time posture detection and fall detection as described in the above example, and motion analysis based on images are performed. It can be used to generate advice information via an algorithm. In addition, measurement data such as temperature, humidity, and amount of sunshine when the user performs training may be utilized.
また、図27に示すように、トレーニング中のユーザの各種の情報を収集するセンサに加えてまたは代えて、トレーニング中のインストラクターの各種の情報を収集するセンサ111を設けてもよい。センサ111は、インストラクターの動きやジェスチャーを検知し、フィットネスジム80にいる現地のユーザおよび/または個人スペース81にいる遠隔のユーザが装着する機械刺激装置104a、104b、104c(以下、機械刺激装置104と総称する。)を介して、力、振動、動き等の機械刺激を付与することを主目的とする。
Further, as shown in FIG. 27, in addition to or in place of the sensor that collects various information of the user during training, a sensor 111 that collects various information of the instructor during training may be provided. The sensor 111 detects the movement or gesture of the instructor and wears the mechanical stimulators 104a, 104b, 104c (hereinafter referred to as the mechanical stimulator 104) worn by a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81. The main purpose is to apply mechanical stimuli such as force, vibration, and movement through (collectively referred to as).
センサ111の方式、種類、設置場所、設置態様は任意である。例えば、インストラクターの胸を叩くという動作を検知する場合、センサ111はインストラクターが着用するフィットネスウェアの胸の部位に取り付けられる圧電センサや押しボタン等の力を検知可能なデバイスによって構成できる。また、インストラクターが自身の胸を叩くという動作、インストラクターが(画面越しで)ユーザの肩を叩くという動作、その他のインストラクターのジェスチャーは、カメラ109として兼用可能な画像センサをセンサ111として利用し、取得された画像に公知の画像認識技術を適用することで検知できる。更に、インストラクターの動きやジェスチャーは、インストラクターの腕や顔等に装着される加速度センサまたは慣性センサをセンサ111として利用して検知してもよい。図22に関して示したユーザの姿勢検知用の姿勢センサ1054を、インストラクターの姿勢検知用のセンサ111として利用し、インストラクターの姿勢からジェスチャー等を検知してもよい。なお、以上のセンサ111に加えてまたは代えて、インストラクター端末12dおよび/またはディレクター端末12e上の操作によって、全部または一部のユーザの機械刺激装置104の全体または指定部位に付与する機械刺激を指示してもよい。
The method, type, installation location, and installation mode of the sensor 111 are arbitrary. For example, when detecting the action of hitting the chest of an instructor, the sensor 111 can be configured by a device capable of detecting a force such as a piezoelectric sensor or a push button attached to a chest portion of fitness wear worn by the instructor. In addition, the action of the instructor hitting his / her chest, the action of the instructor hitting the user's shoulder (through the screen), and the gestures of other instructors are acquired by using the image sensor that can also be used as the camera 109 as the sensor 111. It can be detected by applying a known image recognition technique to the image. Further, the movement or gesture of the instructor may be detected by using the acceleration sensor or the inertial sensor mounted on the instructor's arm, face, or the like as the sensor 111. The posture sensor 1054 for detecting the posture of the user shown with respect to FIG. 22 may be used as the sensor 111 for detecting the posture of the instructor, and a gesture or the like may be detected from the posture of the instructor. In addition to or in place of the above sensor 111, an operation on the instructor terminal 12d and / or the director terminal 12e indicates a mechanical stimulus to be applied to all or a part of the user's mechanical stimulator 104 as a whole or a designated part. You may.
センサ111が測定したインストラクターの各種の情報は、トレーニングプログラム2に含まれるEMS指示データ2Aと共にトレーニング制御サーバ301のトレーニング制御部3011に入力される。トレーニング制御部3011は、センサ111から入力された各種の測定データに基づいて、フィットネスジム80にいる現地のユーザおよび/または個人スペース81にいる遠隔のユーザの全部または一部の機械刺激装置104の全体または指定部位に機械刺激が付与されるよう制御データを生成する。
Various information of the instructor measured by the sensor 111 is input to the training control unit 3011 of the training control server 301 together with the EMS instruction data 2A included in the training program 2. The training control unit 3011 is a mechanical stimulator 104 of all or part of a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81 based on various measurement data input from the sensor 111. Generate control data so that mechanical stimuli are applied to the whole or designated parts.
なお、機械刺激に加えてまたは代えて、トレーニング制御部3011は、センサ111から入力された各種の測定データに基づいて、フィットネスジム80にいる現地のユーザおよび/または個人スペース81にいる遠隔のユーザの全部または一部のEMS装置102の全体または指定部位に電気刺激が付与されるよう制御データを生成してもよい。また、センサ111が測定したインストラクターの各種の情報は、動画サーバ302の映像制御部3Bおよび/または音声制御部3Cに入力されてもよい。例えば、上記のようにインストラクターが胸を叩くという動作をセンサ111が検知した場合、映像制御部3Bはユーザ端末12の表示画面13上でインストラクターの胸の部分を光らせる、胸の部分から汗等を飛び散らせる等の映像上の演出を行い、音声制御部3Cはユーザ端末12のスピーカ14から胸を叩く音その他の効果音を出させる等の音声上の演出を行える。
In addition to or instead of mechanical stimulation, the training control unit 3011 may use the training control unit 3011 as a local user in the fitness gym 80 and / or a remote user in the personal space 81 based on various measurement data input from the sensor 111. Control data may be generated so that electrical stimulation is applied to all or a designated part of the EMS device 102 in whole or in part. Further, various information of the instructor measured by the sensor 111 may be input to the video control unit 3B and / or the voice control unit 3C of the moving image server 302. For example, when the sensor 111 detects the action of the instructor hitting the chest as described above, the image control unit 3B illuminates the instructor's chest on the display screen 13 of the user terminal 12, and sweats from the chest. The voice control unit 3C can perform a video effect such as scattering, and the voice control unit 3C can perform a sound effect such as producing a chest tapping sound or other sound effects from the speaker 14 of the user terminal 12.
ユーザが装着する機械刺激装置104の方式、種類、設置部位、設置態様は任意である。例えば上記のようにインストラクターが胸を叩いた場合にユーザの胸にも同様の感触を与えるために、ユーザが着用するフィットネスウェアとしてのEMS装置102の胸の部位に取り付けられる圧電素子、振動デバイス、触覚装置(ハプティクスデバイス)等の物理的な力、振動、動き等の機械刺激を付与可能な任意のデバイスによって機械刺激装置104を構成できる。
The method, type, installation site, and installation mode of the mechanical stimulator 104 worn by the user are arbitrary. For example, a piezoelectric element, a vibration device, which is attached to the chest portion of the EMS device 102 as fitness wear worn by the user in order to give the user a similar feel when the instructor hits the chest as described above. The mechanical stimulus device 104 can be configured by any device that can apply mechanical stimuli such as physical force, vibration, and movement, such as a tactile device (haptics device).
以上の構成によれば、センサ111が検知したインストラクターの動きやジェスチャー等の各種の情報に同期して(あるいは、インストラクター端末12dおよび/またはディレクター端末12e上の操作に基づいて)、リアルタイムでユーザに対して機械刺激を付与できる(あるいは、電気刺激を付与できる、映像上の演出を行える、音声上の演出を行える)ため、インストラクターとの一体感、トレーニング中の高揚感、トレーニングに対する没入感を演出でき、高いトレーニング効果を実現できる。
According to the above configuration, the user is notified in real time in synchronization with various information such as the movement and gesture of the instructor detected by the sensor 111 (or based on the operation on the instructor terminal 12d and / or the director terminal 12e). On the other hand, mechanical stimulus can be given (or electrical stimulus can be given, visual effect can be performed, audio effect can be performed), so it creates a sense of unity with the instructor, an uplifting feeling during training, and an immersive feeling for training. It can achieve a high training effect.
図28は、変形例に係る電気刺激トレーニング情報通信装置が実現される運動制御システムの構成を模式的に示す。以下、図1と共通する構成については説明を省略する。
FIG. 28 schematically shows the configuration of a motion control system in which the electrical stimulation training information communication device according to the modified example is realized. Hereinafter, the description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will be omitted.
プログラム制御部3は、ユーザ端末12、機器情報取得部108、ディレクター端末12eによって、実行中のトレーニングプログラム2に対して各種の調整を行うEMS制御部3Aと、映像制御部3Bと、音声制御部3Cを備える。EMS制御部3Aは、通常時はトレーニングプログラム2に格納されたEMS指示データ2Aをそのまま出力するが、ディレクター端末12eが緊急停止等の操作を行った場合は、全部または指定された一部のユーザに対するEMS指示データ2Aの提供を中止し、当該ユーザに対する電気刺激の付与を安全に停止させる。
The program control unit 3 includes an EMS control unit 3A, a video control unit 3B, and a voice control unit that make various adjustments to the training program 2 being executed by the user terminal 12, the device information acquisition unit 108, and the director terminal 12e. It is equipped with 3C. Normally, the EMS control unit 3A outputs the EMS instruction data 2A stored in the training program 2 as it is, but when the director terminal 12e performs an operation such as an emergency stop, all or a part of the designated users The provision of the EMS instruction data 2A to the user is stopped, and the application of the electrical stimulus to the user is safely stopped.
通信部4は、ネットワーク19を介して遠隔のユーザと通信するために、同期信号生成部401と、送信部402と、受信部403を備える。同期信号生成部401は、プログラム制御部3を経たEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データの同期のための同期信号を生成する。送信部402は、同期信号生成部401で生成された同期信号を付加して、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを送信する。受信部403は、ネットワーク19を介して遠隔のユーザ端末12cや機器情報取得部108cから各種のデータを受信する。
The communication unit 4 includes a synchronization signal generation unit 401, a transmission unit 402, and a reception unit 403 in order to communicate with a remote user via the network 19. The synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal for synchronization of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data that has passed through the program control unit 3. The transmission unit 402 adds the synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation unit 401, and transmits EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data. The receiving unit 403 receives various data from the remote user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c via the network 19.
図29に、同期信号生成部401で生成される同期信号と、送信部402で生成される送信信号の例を示す。まず、プログラム制御部3から通信部4に入力されるEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データは、それぞれ一定時間長のパケットに分割されている。図示の例では、EMS指示データは三つの時間的に連続するパケットE#1、E#2、E#3に分割され、映像データは三つの時間的に連続するパケットV#1、V#2、V#3に分割され、音声データは三つの時間的に連続するパケットA#1、A#2、A#3に分割されている。ここで、添え字「#1」「#2」「#3」は、各データを遠隔のユーザに提供すべきタイミングを意味する。すなわち、添え字「#1」が付いた三つのパケットE#1、V#1、A#1、添え字「#2」が付いた三つのパケットE#2、V#2、A#2、添え字「#3」が付いた三つのパケットE#3、V#3、A#3は、それぞれ同じタイミングで遠隔のユーザに提供すべきである。以下、これらのタイミングをそれぞれT1、T2、T3で表す。上記の通り、これらのデータ間の同期が高い精度で実現される場合、遠隔のユーザはあたかもフィットネスジム80でトレーニングしているかのようにトレーニングに没入できる。
FIG. 29 shows an example of a synchronization signal generated by the synchronization signal generation unit 401 and a transmission signal generated by the transmission unit 402. First, the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data input from the program control unit 3 to the communication unit 4 are each divided into packets having a fixed time length. In the illustrated example, the EMS instruction data is divided into three time-consecutive packets E # 1, E # 2, and E # 3, and the video data is three time-consecutive packets V # 1, V # 2. , V # 3, and the audio data is divided into three temporally continuous packets A # 1, A # 2, and A # 3. Here, the subscripts "# 1", "# 2", and "# 3" mean the timing at which each data should be provided to a remote user. That is, three packets E # 1, V # 1, A # 1 with the subscript "# 1", and three packets E # 2, V # 2, A # 2, with the subscript "# 2". The three packets E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 with the subscript "# 3" should be provided to the remote user at the same timing. Hereinafter, these timings are represented by T1, T2, and T3, respectively. As mentioned above, if synchronization between these data is achieved with high accuracy, remote users can immerse themselves in training as if they were training in the fitness gym 80.
図29(A)は、送信部402が、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを並列(パラレル)に送信する場合に、同期信号生成部401が、各データの各パケットの先頭に提供タイミングを表す同期信号を挿入する例である。提供タイミングがT1の各パケットE#1、V#1、A#1の先頭には、そのタイミングを表す同一の同期信号S1が挿入され、提供タイミングがT2の各パケットE#2、V#2、A#2の先頭には、そのタイミングを表す同一の同期信号S2が挿入され、提供タイミングがT3の各パケットE#3、V#3、A#3の先頭には、そのタイミングを表す同一の同期信号S3が挿入される。したがって、この例では、同期信号生成部401が1パケットの頻度で同期信号を生成する。なお、同期信号S1~S3は、受信側で三つのデータのタイミングを合わせることができるものであればよく、必ずしも三つのデータで同一の信号とする必要はない。例えば、EMS指示データの同期信号S1には、プログラム開始時刻からの経過時間等の詳細な提供タイミングを書き込む一方で、映像データ、音声データの同期信号S1´には、同期信号S1と関連付ける情報のみを書き込むことで、受信側で同期信号S1とS1´の同期を取り、かつ同期信号S1から詳細な提供タイミングを取得できる。
In FIG. 29A, when the transmission unit 402 transmits EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data in parallel, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 sets the provision timing at the beginning of each packet of each data. This is an example of inserting a representative synchronization signal. The same synchronization signal S1 representing the timing is inserted at the beginning of each packet E # 1, V # 1, A # 1 whose provision timing is T1, and each packet E # 2, V # 2 whose provision timing is T2 is inserted. , The same synchronization signal S2 indicating the timing is inserted at the beginning of A # 2, and the same timing indicating the timing is inserted at the beginning of each packet E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 whose provision timing is T3. Synchronous signal S3 is inserted. Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of one packet. The synchronization signals S1 to S3 may be any signal as long as the timings of the three data can be adjusted on the receiving side, and the three data do not necessarily have to be the same signal. For example, while the detailed provision timing such as the elapsed time from the program start time is written in the synchronization signal S1 of the EMS instruction data, only the information associated with the synchronization signal S1 is written in the synchronization signal S1'of the video data and the audio data. By writing, the synchronization signal S1 and S1'can be synchronized on the receiving side, and the detailed provision timing can be obtained from the synchronization signal S1.
図29(B)は、図29(A)のように1パケット毎に同期信号を挿入する代わりに、1より大きい任意の整数をNとして、Nパケット毎に同期信号を挿入する例である。提供タイミングT1のパケットの前に同期信号S1を挿入した後は、しばらく同期信号を挿入せずに「#N」(提供タイミングTN)のパケットまで連続して送信し、「#N+1」(提供タイミングTN+1)のパケットの前に同期信号S2を挿入する。したがって、この例では、同期信号生成部401がNパケットの頻度で同期信号を生成する。この例によれば、Nパケット毎に各データの同期を取ることができる。ネットワーク19の環境に依存するものの、1パケット中にデータ間で有意な伝送遅延差が発生することは稀であり、この例のように複数パケット毎に同期を取れば十分な場合が多い。
FIG. 29 (B) is an example in which an arbitrary integer larger than 1 is set as N and a synchronization signal is inserted for each N packet instead of inserting the synchronization signal for each packet as shown in FIG. 29 (A). After the synchronization signal S1 is inserted before the packet of the provision timing T1, the synchronization signal is not inserted for a while, and the packet of "# N" (providing timing TN) is continuously transmitted to "# N + 1" (providing timing). The synchronization signal S2 is inserted before the packet of TN + 1). Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of N packets. According to this example, each data can be synchronized for each N packet. Although it depends on the environment of the network 19, it is rare that a significant transmission delay difference occurs between data in one packet, and it is often sufficient to synchronize each of a plurality of packets as in this example.
図29(C)は、送信部402が、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを直列(シリアル)に送信する場合に、同期信号生成部401が、三つのデータ中の同一タイミングの三つのパケットからなる基本パケット群の先頭に同期信号を挿入する例である。すなわち、同期信号S1は、提供タイミングがT1の三つのパケットE#1、V#1、A#1からなる基本パケット群の先頭に挿入され、同期信号S2は、提供タイミングがT2の三つのパケットE#2、V#2、A#2からなる基本パケット群の先頭に挿入され、同期信号S3は、提供タイミングがT3の三つのパケットE#3、V#3、A#3からなる基本パケット群の先頭に挿入される。したがって、この例では、同期信号生成部401が3パケット(1基本パケット群)の頻度で同期信号を生成する。
In FIG. 29C, when the transmission unit 402 transmits EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data in series (serial), the synchronization signal generation unit 401 uses three packets at the same timing in the three data. This is an example of inserting a synchronization signal at the beginning of a basic packet group consisting of. That is, the synchronization signal S1 is inserted at the beginning of the basic packet group consisting of three packets E # 1, V # 1, and A # 1 whose provision timing is T1, and the synchronization signal S2 is the three packets whose provision timing is T2. Inserted at the beginning of the basic packet group consisting of E # 2, V # 2, and A # 2, the synchronization signal S3 is a basic packet consisting of three packets E # 3, V # 3, and A # 3 whose provision timing is T3. Inserted at the beginning of the group. Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of 3 packets (1 basic packet group).
図29(D)は、図29(C)のように1基本パケット群毎に同期信号を挿入する代わりに、N基本パケット群毎に同期信号を挿入する例である。提供タイミングT1の基本パケット群の前に同期信号S1を挿入した後は、しばらく同期信号を挿入せずに「#N」(提供タイミングTN)の基本パケット群まで連続して送信し、「#N+1」(提供タイミングTN+1)の基本パケット群の前に同期信号S2を挿入する。したがって、この例では、同期信号生成部401が3Nパケット(N基本パケット群)の頻度で同期信号を生成する。この例によれば、図29(B)と同様に、Nパケット毎に各データの同期を取ることができる。
FIG. 29 (D) is an example in which a synchronization signal is inserted for each N basic packet group instead of inserting a synchronization signal for each basic packet group as shown in FIG. 29 (C). After the synchronization signal S1 is inserted before the basic packet group of the provision timing T1, the synchronization signal is not inserted for a while and continuously transmitted to the basic packet group of "#N" (provided timing TN), and "# N + 1". (Provision timing TN + 1), the synchronization signal S2 is inserted before the basic packet group. Therefore, in this example, the synchronization signal generation unit 401 generates a synchronization signal at a frequency of 3N packets (N basic packet group). According to this example, as in FIG. 29B, each data can be synchronized for each N packet.
以上、図29では単純なパラレル伝送とシリアル伝送の例を示したが、より複雑な伝送方法、例えば、送信側および受信側で任意の複数のアンテナを用いるMIMO伝送にも上記の技術思想は適用可能である。どのような伝送方法であっても、異なる種類のデータ(EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データ)の同期のための同期信号を送信信号に埋め込み、受信側で同期信号に基づいて各データを所定の時間順に整列できるようにすればよい。
Although the examples of simple parallel transmission and serial transmission are shown above in FIG. 29, the above technical idea is also applied to a more complicated transmission method, for example, MIMO transmission using an arbitrary plurality of antennas on the transmitting side and the receiving side. It is possible. Regardless of the transmission method, a synchronization signal for synchronizing different types of data (EMS instruction data, video data, audio data) is embedded in the transmission signal, and each data is specified on the receiving side based on the synchronization signal. It should be possible to arrange them in chronological order.
通信部5は、遠隔ユーザのいる個人スペース81において、フィットネスジム80の通信部4との間でネットワーク19を介して通信する。通信部4の構成要素と対応して、通信部5は、データ同期部501と、受信部502と、送信部503を備える。これらの通信部5の機能は、タブレットやスマートフォン等の汎用の通信機器で構成されるユーザ端末12cで実現できる。受信部502は、送信部402から送信される、同期信号が付加されたEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを受信する。データ同期部501は、受信した同期信号に基づき、EMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データを同期させる。送信部503は、ユーザ端末12cや機器情報取得部108cからの各種データを受信部403に送信する。
The communication unit 5 communicates with the communication unit 4 of the fitness gym 80 via the network 19 in the personal space 81 where the remote user is located. Corresponding to the components of the communication unit 4, the communication unit 5 includes a data synchronization unit 501, a reception unit 502, and a transmission unit 503. These functions of the communication unit 5 can be realized by a user terminal 12c composed of a general-purpose communication device such as a tablet or a smartphone. The receiving unit 502 receives the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data to which the synchronization signal is added, which are transmitted from the transmitting unit 402. The data synchronization unit 501 synchronizes the EMS instruction data, the video data, and the audio data based on the received synchronization signal. The transmission unit 503 transmits various data from the user terminal 12c and the device information acquisition unit 108c to the reception unit 403.
データ同期部501は、受信した同期信号に基づき、図29で示される処理と逆の処理を行う。すなわち、図29(A)~(D)のどの態様の信号を受信したとしても、初めに同期信号S1等を特定し、それを基準としてEMS指示データ、映像データ、音声データの各パケットを然るべき提供タイミングT1、T2、T3に配置する処理を行う。これにより、パケットE#1、V#1、A#1は提供タイミングT1に同期され、パケットE#2、V#2、A#2は提供タイミングT2に同期され、パケットE#3、V#3、A#3は提供タイミングT3に同期される。このように、遠隔の個人スペース81にいるユーザにも同期の取れた電気刺激(EMS装置102c)、映像(表示画面13c)、音声(スピーカ14c)を提供することが可能になる。
The data synchronization unit 501 performs the reverse processing of the processing shown in FIG. 29 based on the received synchronization signal. That is, regardless of which mode of the signals of FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (D) is received, the synchronization signal S1 and the like are first specified, and each packet of EMS instruction data, video data, and audio data should be appropriate based on the synchronization signal S1 and the like. The process of arranging at the provision timings T1, T2, and T3 is performed. As a result, packets E # 1, V # 1, and A # 1 are synchronized with the provision timing T1, packets E # 2, V # 2, and A # 2 are synchronized with the provision timing T2, and packets E # 3 and V # are synchronized. 3. A # 3 is synchronized with the provision timing T3. In this way, it becomes possible to provide synchronized electrical stimulation (EMS device 102c), video (display screen 13c), and voice (speaker 14c) to a user in a remote personal space 81.
また、遠隔のユーザがトレーニングプログラム2の途中から参加する場合も、データ同期部501の作用により、他のユーザと同期してトレーニングを行える。すなわち、トレーニングプログラム2実行中に所定の頻度で生成される同期信号を順にS1、S2、S3・・・とする場合、n番目の同期信号Snが送信されるタイミングで途中から参加したユーザは、その同期信号Snに基づいて同期されたn番目のパケットE#n、V#n、A#nからトレーニングプログラム2の実行を開始すればよい。このとき、同期信号Snの特定とn番目のパケットの特定の処理のため、最大で数秒程度の遅延が発生しうるが、大きな問題とはならない。インストラクターや他のユーザに対して遅延していたとしても、そのユーが受け取るパケットは同期が取れているので、ユーザは遅延があることに気付かない。一点、図17に関して前述したインストラクターとの「コール&レスポンス」のやり取りにおいては遅延の影響が現れるが、これは多数のユーザのレスポンスに基づくトレーニングの盛り上がりの程度を示すものであり、数秒程度の遅延があっても大きな問題にはなるものではない。
Also, even when a remote user participates from the middle of the training program 2, the training can be performed in synchronization with other users by the action of the data synchronization unit 501. That is, when the synchronization signals generated at a predetermined frequency during the execution of the training program 2 are S1, S2, S3 ... In order, the user who participates from the middle at the timing when the nth synchronization signal Sn is transmitted Execution of the training program 2 may be started from the nth packet E # n, V # n, A # n synchronized based on the synchronization signal Sn. At this time, a delay of up to several seconds may occur due to the specification of the synchronization signal Sn and the specific processing of the nth packet, but this does not pose a big problem. Even if it is delayed for the instructor or another user, the packet received by that user is synchronized so that the user is unaware of the delay. One point, regarding FIG. 17, the effect of delay appears in the above-mentioned "call & response" exchange with the instructor, but this shows the degree of excitement of training based on the response of many users, and the delay is about several seconds. Even if there is, it does not become a big problem.
なお、実施の形態で説明した各装置の機能構成はハードウェア資源またはソフトウェア資源により、あるいはハードウェア資源とソフトウェア資源の協働により実現できる。ハードウェア資源としてプロセッサ、ROM、RAM、その他のLSIを利用できる。ソフトウェア資源としてオペレーティングシステム、アプリケーション等のプログラムを利用できる。
The functional configuration of each device described in the embodiment can be realized by the hardware resource or the software resource, or by the cooperation of the hardware resource and the software resource. Processors, ROMs, RAMs, and other LSIs can be used as hardware resources. Programs such as operating systems and applications can be used as software resources.
本発明は、電気刺激の付与を伴うトレーニングに関する情報の通信に関する。
The present invention relates to the communication of information regarding training accompanied by the application of electrical stimulation.
2 トレーニングプログラム、2A EMS指示データ、2B 映像データ、2C 音声データ、3 プログラム制御部、3A EMS制御部、3B 映像制御部、3C 音声制御部、4 通信部、5 通信部、12a ユーザ端末、12b ユーザ端末、12c ユーザ端末、12d インストラクター端末、12e ディレクター端末、80 フィットネスジム、81 個人スペース、100 運動制御システム、102 EMS装置、103 バイク、104 機械刺激装置、105 ミラーディスプレイ、108 機器情報取得部、111 センサ、301 トレーニング制御サーバ、302 動画サーバ、401 同期信号生成部、402 送信部、501 データ同期部、502 受信部、832 レスポンスボタン、841 レスポンス表示部、843 緊急停止ボタン、1035 発光部、1054 姿勢センサ、3011 トレーニング制御部、3012 同期信号生成部、3013 トレーニング情報送信部、3021 同期信号生成部、3022 動画送信部。
2 Training program, 2A EMS instruction data, 2B video data, 2C voice data, 3 program control unit, 3A EMS control unit, 3B video control unit, 3C voice control unit, 4 communication unit, 5 communication unit, 12a user terminal, 12b User terminal, 12c user terminal, 12d instructor terminal, 12e director terminal, 80 fitness gym, 81 personal space, 100 exercise control system, 102 EMS device, 103 bike, 104 machine stimulation device, 105 mirror display, 108 device information acquisition unit, 111 sensor, 301 training control server, 302 video server, 401 synchronization signal generation unit, 402 transmission unit, 501 data synchronization unit, 502 reception unit, 832 response button, 841 response display unit, 843 emergency stop button, 1035 light emitting unit, 1054 Attitude sensor, 3011 training control unit, 3012 synchronization signal generation unit, 3013 training information transmission unit, 3021 synchronization signal generation unit, 3022 video transmission unit.
Claims (10)
- トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供部と、
トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部と、
前記映像データと前記指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成部と、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を送信する送信部と
を備える電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置。 The video data provider that provides the video data that the user sees during training,
An electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit.
A synchronization signal generation unit that generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data,
An electrical stimulation training information transmission device including a transmission unit for transmitting the video data and the synchronization signal. - 前記送信部は、前記映像データと前記指示データの両方に前記同期信号を挿入して送信する
請求項1に記載の電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置。 The electrical stimulation training information transmission device according to claim 1, wherein the transmission unit inserts the synchronization signal into both the video data and the instruction data and transmits the synchronization signal. - 前記同期信号生成部は、前記同期信号を所定の頻度で生成する
請求項1または2に記載の電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置。 The electrical stimulation training information transmission device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the synchronization signal generation unit generates the synchronization signal at a predetermined frequency. - 前記映像データは、ユーザが行うべきトレーニングを指導するインストラクターの映像を含み、
前記映像データおよび前記指示データの提供は、前記インストラクターとは異なるディレクターの操作に基づき開始される
請求項1から3のいずれかに記載の電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置。 The video data includes a video of an instructor who guides the training that the user should perform.
The electrical stimulation training information transmitting device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the provision of the video data and the instruction data is started based on an operation of a director different from the instructor. - トレーニング中にユーザが聞く音声データを提供する音声データ提供部を備え、
前記同期信号生成部は、前記映像データ、前記音声データおよび前記指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成し、
前記送信部は、前記映像データ、前記音声データおよび前記同期信号を送信する
請求項1から4のいずれかに記載の電気刺激トレーニング情報送信装置。 Equipped with a voice data provider that provides voice data that the user hears during training
The synchronization signal generation unit generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data, the audio data, and the instruction data.
The electrical stimulation training information transmission device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the transmission unit transmits the video data, the audio data, and the synchronization signal. - トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データと、当該映像データとトレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データの同期のための同期信号とを受信する受信部と、
前記同期信号に基づき、前記映像データと前記指示データを同期させるデータ同期部と
を備える電気刺激トレーニング情報受信装置。 A receiver that receives video data viewed by the user during training and a synchronization signal for synchronization of the video data and the instruction data of the electrical stimulation given by the electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training.
An electrical stimulation training information receiving device including a data synchronization unit that synchronizes the video data and the instruction data based on the synchronization signal. - 前記映像データは、ユーザが行うべきトレーニングを指導するインストラクターの映像を含み、
トレーニング中のユーザの操作に基づき前記インストラクターに対する意思表示をする意思表示部を備える
請求項6に記載の電気刺激トレーニング情報受信装置。 The video data includes a video of an instructor who guides the training that the user should perform.
The electrical stimulation training information receiving device according to claim 6, further comprising an intention display unit for displaying the intention to the instructor based on the operation of the user during training. - トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供部と、
トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供部と、
前記映像データと前記指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成部と、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を送信する送信部と、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を受信する受信部と、
前記同期信号に基づき、前記映像データと前記指示データを同期させるデータ同期部と
を備える電気刺激トレーニング情報通信装置。 The video data provider that provides the video data that the user sees during training,
An electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing unit.
A synchronization signal generation unit that generates a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data,
A transmission unit that transmits the video data and the synchronization signal,
A receiving unit that receives the video data and the synchronization signal,
An electrical stimulation training information communication device including a data synchronization unit that synchronizes the video data and the instruction data based on the synchronization signal. - トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供ステップと、
トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供ステップと、
前記映像データと前記指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成ステップと、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を送信する送信ステップと、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を受信する受信ステップと、
前記同期信号に基づき、前記映像データと前記指示データを同期させるデータ同期ステップと
を備える電気刺激トレーニング情報通信方法。 A video data provision step that provides video data that the user sees during training,
An electrical stimulation instruction data providing step that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing step.
A synchronization signal generation step for generating a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data, and
A transmission step for transmitting the video data and the synchronization signal, and
A reception step for receiving the video data and the synchronization signal, and
An electrical stimulation training information communication method including a data synchronization step for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data based on the synchronization signal. - トレーニング中にユーザが見る映像データを提供する映像データ提供ステップと、
トレーニング中にユーザが身につける電気刺激装置によって付与する電気刺激の指示データを提供する電気刺激指示データ提供ステップと、
前記映像データと前記指示データの同期のための同期信号を生成する同期信号生成ステップと、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を送信する送信ステップと、
前記映像データおよび前記同期信号を受信する受信ステップと、
前記同期信号に基づき、前記映像データと前記指示データとを同期させるデータ同期ステップと
をコンピュータに実行させる電気刺激トレーニング情報通信プログラム。 A video data provision step that provides video data that the user sees during training,
An electrical stimulation instruction data providing step that provides instruction data for electrical stimulation given by an electrical stimulation device worn by the user during training, and an electrical stimulation instruction data providing step.
A synchronization signal generation step for generating a synchronization signal for synchronizing the video data and the instruction data, and
A transmission step for transmitting the video data and the synchronization signal, and
A reception step for receiving the video data and the synchronization signal, and
An electrical stimulation training information communication program that causes a computer to perform a data synchronization step of synchronizing the video data and the instruction data based on the synchronization signal.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2022556915A JPWO2022085491A1 (en) | 2020-10-19 | 2021-10-08 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020-175555 | 2020-10-19 | ||
JP2020175555 | 2020-10-19 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022085491A1 true WO2022085491A1 (en) | 2022-04-28 |
Family
ID=81290464
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/037358 WO2022085491A1 (en) | 2020-10-19 | 2021-10-08 | Electrical stimulation training information transmission device, electrical stimulation training information reception device, electrical stimulation training information communication device, electrical stimulation training information communication method, and electrical stimulation training information communication program |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JPWO2022085491A1 (en) |
TW (1) | TW202228814A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2022085491A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117612724A (en) * | 2024-01-23 | 2024-02-27 | 南京麦豆健康科技有限公司 | Privacy assessment method and system for female vaginal relaxation state |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117473328B (en) * | 2023-12-26 | 2024-03-15 | 南京麦豆健康科技有限公司 | Big data-based vaginal relaxation assessment training system and method |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP4840926B2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2011-12-21 | 学校法人 久留米大学 | Muscle electrical stimulation system using virtual images |
JP2014079329A (en) * | 2012-10-15 | 2014-05-08 | Nikon Corp | Wearable muscle strength detection tool, control device, and muscle strength detection system |
CN104939815A (en) * | 2015-07-15 | 2015-09-30 | 张鸣生 | Comprehensive feedback type pulmonary rehabilitation assessment treatment instrument |
JP2019069172A (en) * | 2014-08-26 | 2019-05-09 | 国立研究開発法人理化学研究所 | Brain wave signal processing device, brain wave signal processing method, program, and recording medium |
WO2019172297A1 (en) * | 2018-03-06 | 2019-09-12 | 株式会社Mtg | Electric shock device fitness wear |
-
2021
- 2021-10-08 WO PCT/JP2021/037358 patent/WO2022085491A1/en active Application Filing
- 2021-10-08 JP JP2022556915A patent/JPWO2022085491A1/ja active Pending
- 2021-10-12 TW TW110137813A patent/TW202228814A/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP4840926B2 (en) * | 2004-08-27 | 2011-12-21 | 学校法人 久留米大学 | Muscle electrical stimulation system using virtual images |
JP2014079329A (en) * | 2012-10-15 | 2014-05-08 | Nikon Corp | Wearable muscle strength detection tool, control device, and muscle strength detection system |
JP2019069172A (en) * | 2014-08-26 | 2019-05-09 | 国立研究開発法人理化学研究所 | Brain wave signal processing device, brain wave signal processing method, program, and recording medium |
CN104939815A (en) * | 2015-07-15 | 2015-09-30 | 张鸣生 | Comprehensive feedback type pulmonary rehabilitation assessment treatment instrument |
WO2019172297A1 (en) * | 2018-03-06 | 2019-09-12 | 株式会社Mtg | Electric shock device fitness wear |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117612724A (en) * | 2024-01-23 | 2024-02-27 | 南京麦豆健康科技有限公司 | Privacy assessment method and system for female vaginal relaxation state |
CN117612724B (en) * | 2024-01-23 | 2024-04-12 | 南京麦豆健康科技有限公司 | Privacy assessment method and system for female vaginal relaxation state |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
TW202228814A (en) | 2022-08-01 |
JPWO2022085491A1 (en) | 2022-04-28 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2022085491A1 (en) | Electrical stimulation training information transmission device, electrical stimulation training information reception device, electrical stimulation training information communication device, electrical stimulation training information communication method, and electrical stimulation training information communication program | |
US9292935B2 (en) | Sensor-based evaluation and feedback of exercise performance | |
US9986771B2 (en) | Garments having stretchable and conductive ink | |
EP2895050B1 (en) | Wearable communication platform | |
US8948839B1 (en) | Compression garments having stretchable and conductive ink | |
US20220274001A1 (en) | Cycle and coordinated punch exercise device and methods | |
US20150196805A1 (en) | Fuzzy logic-based evaluation and feedback of exercise performance | |
WO2016131936A2 (en) | Device, system and method for the transmission of stimuli | |
CN109646876B (en) | Treadmill based on virtual scene sharing and fitness method thereof | |
JP2019150545A (en) | Movement booth installation structure and method | |
JP7491931B2 (en) | Electrical Stimulation Fitness Wear | |
US20170348583A1 (en) | Wearable technology for enhancing kinesthetic performance | |
CN107224713A (en) | A kind of smart motion body-building apparatus and its application method based on VR equipment | |
CN111068257B (en) | Upper limb rehabilitation training device | |
JP7178786B2 (en) | motion control system | |
CN208259696U (en) | Intelligent clothing and intelligent interactive system with the intelligent clothing | |
US20230218967A1 (en) | Camera equipped cycle and coordinated punch exercise device and methods | |
CN204582402U (en) | Games Interactive treadmill | |
CN110808091B (en) | Sensory integration maladjustment training system based on virtual reality visual-audio sense path | |
CN109621310A (en) | A kind of initiative rehabilitation training system based on Internet of Things | |
WO2019120275A1 (en) | Portable intelligent bodybuilding equipment based on internet of things, exercise system, and application method therefor | |
CN205193781U (en) | Many screens intelligence networking motion display device | |
CN214597000U (en) | Outdoor fitness equipment of type of independently taking exercise | |
WO2023204035A1 (en) | Exercise menu management device, exercise management method, and computer program | |
WO2022264917A1 (en) | Electrical stimulation fitness wear |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21882632 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2022556915 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21882632 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |